Quarterlytics / Tableau Software Inc / FY2021 Annual Report

Tableau Software Inc
Annual Report 2021

DATA · LSE
Claim this profile
Ticker DATA
Exchange LSE
Sector
Industry
Employees 1001-5000
← All annual reports
FY2021 Annual Report · Tableau Software Inc
Loading PDF…
GlobalData Plc

Annual   
report &  
accounts

For the year ended 31 December 2021

www.globaldata.com

COMPANY NO. 03925319

Contents

STRATEGIC REPORT

2021 Highlights 
Our Business  

Principal Activity 
Our Business Model 
Chairman’s Statement  
Chief Executive’s Report 
Chief Financial Officer’s Report 
Principal and Emerging Risks and Uncertainties 
Directors’ Section 172(1) Statement 
Going Concern and Viability 

DIRECTORS’ REPORT 

The Directors 
Corporate Governance Report 
Environmental, Social and Governance 
Audit Committee Report 
Directors’ Remuneration Report 
Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities 

INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT 

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Group 

Consolidated Income Statement 
Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income 
Consolidated Statement of Financial Position 
Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity 
Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements 

Company 

Company Statement of Financial Position 
Company Statement of Changes in Equity 
Notes to the Company Financial Statements 

Advisers 

4

6
7
11
13
18
24 
30
34

36
39
47
51
55 
62

65

 76
77
78
79
80
81

129
130
131

143

Reliance on this document
Our  Business  Review  on  pages  4-22  has  been  prepared  in  accordance  with  the  Strategic  Report  requirements  of  section  414C  of  the 
Companies Act 2006. The intention of this document is to provide information to shareholders and is not designed to be relied upon by any 
other party or for any other purpose.

Forward-looking statements
This document contains forward-looking statements which are made by the Directors in good faith based on information available to them 
at the time  of  approval  of this  report.  In  particular,  all  statements that  express forecasts,  expectations  and  projections with  respect to 
future matters, including trends in results of operations, margins, growth rates, overall market trends, the impact of interest or exchange 
rates, the availability of financing, anticipated costs savings and synergies and the execution of GlobalData Plc’s strategy, are forward-
looking statements. By their nature, forward-looking statements involve risks and uncertainties because they relate to events and depend 
on circumstances that will occur in the future. There are a number of factors which could cause actual results and developments to differ 
materially  from  those  expressed  or  implied  by  these  forward-looking  statements,  including  a  number  of  factors  outside  of  GlobalData 
Plc’s  control.  Any  forward-looking  statements  speak  only  as  of  the  date  they  are  made,  and  GlobalData  Plc  gives  no  undertaking  to 
update forward-looking statements to reflect any changes in its expectations with regard thereto or any changes to events, conditions or 
circumstances on which any such statement is based.

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

3

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Strategic Report

2021 Highlights 
2021 Highlights 

Key performance metrics

Revenue: +6% 
Organic Underlying Constant Currency4: +8%

2021 
2020 

Adj. EBITDA1: +14%
Organic Underlying Constant Currency4: +14%

2021 
2020 

Adj. EBITDA margin1: +2p.p.
Organic Underlying Constant Currency4: +2p.p.

2021 
2020 

Statutory PBT: +14%

2021 
2020 

Deferred revenue2: +9% 
Organic Underlying Constant Currency4: +9%

2021 
2020 

Invoiced forward revenue³: +16%
Organic Underlying Constant Currency4: +10%

2021 
2020 

£189.3m

£178.4m

£64.4m

£56.7m

34%

32%

£32.6m

£28.6m

£81.4m

£74.7m

£92.7m

£107.7m

“Our clear focus is on sustainable growth  
delivered through four key pillars:  
Customer Obsession, World-Class Product,  
Sales Excellence and Operational Agility.”

 Mike Danson, Chief Executive Officer

Note 1: Adjusted EBITDA: Earnings before interest, tax, depreciation and amortisation, adjusted to exclude costs associated with acquisitions, restructuring 

of the Group, share-based payments, impairment, unrealised operating exchange rate movements and the impact of foreign exchange contracts. Adjusted 

EBITDA margin is defined as: Adjusted EBITDA as a percentage of revenue. This is reconciled to the statutory operating profit on page 18.

Note 2: Deferred revenue: Deferred revenue relates to amounts that are invoiced to clients at the statement of financial position date, which relate to future 

revenue to be recognised. This is adjusted for amounts that are not yet due for payment and the service has not yet commenced. This is reconciled to invoiced 

forward revenue on page 20.

Note 3: Invoiced forward revenue: Invoiced forward revenue relates to amounts that are invoiced to clients at the statement of financial position date, which 

relate to future revenue to be recognised. This is reconciled to deferred revenue on page 20.

Note 4: Organic underlying constant currency: Defined as growth in business (excluding acquisitions) excluding impact of movement in exchange rates. This 

is reconciled to the reported change on page 21. 

4

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Strategic Report
Strategic Report

Financial and Operational Highlights 

Continued  
investment in Growth 
Optimisation Plan 
and progress across 
strategic priorities, with 
Customer Obsession 
our number-one  
priority

Adjusted EBITDA1  
up 14% to

£64.4m

 (2020: £56.7m) and 
Adjusted EBITDA 
margin1 improvement of 
2 percentage points to 

Completion 
of two 
strategic 
acquisitions

Deferred revenue2 
up 9% to

Organic underlying 
constant currency4 
revenue growth of 

offset with currency 
headwinds for 
reported growth of

8% 
6% 

Statutory PBT 
 grew by £4.0m to

£32.6m

(2020: £28.6m)

34% 

Customer  
focused initiatives 
have driven growth 
and further  
deepening of our 
relationships 

£81.4m

(2020: £74.7m) and Invoiced 
forward revenue3 up 

16%

to £107.7m (2020: £92.7m), 
with organic underlying 
constant currency  
growth of 10%

Final dividend of 

13.2p

up 14% (2020: 11.6p); total 
dividend of 19.3p, up 14% 
(2020: 17.0p)

Set strong 
foundations for 
accelerated growth 
through One Platform 
enhancements and 
investment in 
 B2B industry 
websites

Note 1: Adjusted EBITDA: Earnings before interest, tax, depreciation and amortisation, adjusted to exclude costs associated with acquisitions, restructuring 

of the Group, share-based payments, impairment, unrealised operating exchange rate movements and the impact of foreign exchange contracts. Adjusted 

EBITDA margin is defined as: Adjusted EBITDA as a percentage of revenue. This is reconciled to the statutory operating profit on page 18.

Note 2: Deferred revenue: Deferred revenue relates to amounts that are invoiced to clients at the statement of financial position date, which relate to future 

revenue to be recognised. This is adjusted for amounts that are not yet due for payment and the service has not yet commenced. This is reconciled to invoiced 

forward revenue on page 20.

Note 3: Invoiced forward revenue: Invoiced forward revenue relates to amounts that are invoiced to clients at the statement of financial position date, which 

relate to future revenue to be recognised. This is reconciled to deferred revenue on page 20.

Note 4: Organic underlying constant currency: Defined as growth in business (excluding acquisitions) excluding impact of movement in exchange rates. This 

is reconciled to the reported change on page 21. 

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

5

Principal Activity: The principal activity of GlobalData 
Plc and its subsidiaries (‘the Group’) is to provide business 
information in the form of high-quality proprietary data, 
analytics, and insights to clients in multiple sectors.

Our Mission::To help our clients to decode the future, make 
better decisions, and reach more customers.

Our Vision::To be the leading data, analytics, and insights 
platform for the world’s largest industries.

A snapshot of our Group

16  
industry 
sector deep 
coverage

+4,600 
clients

31 December 2021

3,624 
employees

6

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Strategic Report

Our Business

OUR BUSINESS MODEL

The Group provides service across a breadth of industry markets and 
functions, on a global scale on One Platform. We have a clear philosophy 
of owning our own data and intellectual property, and seek to be a long-
term, strategic partner to our clients, by serving their critical activities 
with a differentiated, “gold standard” offering. 

The visible and recurring revenue base creates a resilient business model, 
with subscriptions making up over 80% of revenue. The balance of our 
revenue  is  made  up  of  ancillary  services  such  as  bespoke  consulting, 
single copy reports, and events, which all harness our core assets.

GlobalData’s client base is globally diversified, which reflects our globally 
relevant data assets and gives the Group significant market opportunity. 

The  Group  assesses  potential  M&A  targets  and  looks  for  the  same 
business  model  fundamentals  in  its  targets,  which  enables  greater 
alignment and integration opportunities.

The  solutions  we  provide  are  highly  proprietary  and  embedded  into 
our  customers’ workflows, which  drives  high  customer  retention. The 
Group benefits from significant operating leverage due to a “build once, 
sell  multiple  times”  business  model,  which  drives  significant  margin 
expansion.

Our  clients  typically  subscribe  for  12  months’  access.  This  approach 
drives the following business model attributes:

• 

• 

• 

• 

Recurring  revenue  –  highly  recurring  subscription 
revenue, with high retention and revenue visibility
incremental  margins  –  significant  operating 
High 
leverage  due  to  “build  once,  sell  multiple  times”  model, 
and a largely fixed cost base.
Strong cash flow generation – low capital requirements 
and  mostly  advance  customer  payments  support  high 
cash  flow  conversion,  working  capital  benefits  and 
capacity for reinvestment. 
Scalable  and  defensible  position  –  large,  diversified 
opportunities with attractive tailwinds, strong competitive 
moat and an agile, scalable company with one platform.

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

7

 
Strategic Report

Our Business

CAPITAL ALLOCATION

Our objective is to achieve long-term compounding growth and maximise shareholder returns. 

Volume Renewal

Cost Discipline

Reinvestment

GROWING OUR REVENUE 
Consistent 10%+ Growth Range

Value Renewal

+

New Logo

INCREASING OUR PROFITABILITY
Adj. EBITDA Margin 35%-40% Range

Scalable Model

+

Technology Investment

+

+

+

+

M&A

Process Optimisation

REINVEST AND RETURN CAPITAL 

+

Acquisitions

+

Dividends/ Share buy-backs

INVESTING IN GROWTH

CAPITAL RETURN

Reinvestment

Acquisitions

Dividends

Share Purchase

We aim to provide a 
progressive dividend policy 
which grows in line with 
Adjusted EBITDA. 

The Company has a policy to 
try and limit the dilution of its 
existing shareholders created 
via the Group’s Long-Term 
Incentive Plans.

As at the date of this report, 
the Remuneration Committee 
has approved that the vesting 
criteria of Scheme 1 has been 
met, resulting in 6.5 million 
options becoming available 
for vest. The company’s 
Employee Benefit Trusts have 
a current combined holding 
of 5.9 million shares to cover 
90% of the options vesting. 

M&A is a significant growth 
strategy for our business.

Our scalable One Platform 
infrastructure enables 
us to efficiently integrate 
new data sets and content 
capabilities into our existing 
vertical offering or expand 
our breadth into new vertical 
markets, enabling the Group 
to realise synergy and value. 

As a management team we 
have extensive experience 
of acquiring and integrating 
assets and we currently 
have an active pipeline of 
businesses that we are 
assessing, as well as the 
firepower to execute.

The Group benefits from 
significant operating leverage 
due to constant fixed costs and 
a lower variable cost model that 
generates long-term margin 
expansion in an accelerating 
revenue growth environment. 

Our operating cost base is 
very agile and has investment 
embedded within “business-as-
usual” for Customer Obsession, 
new product development and 
software and IT enhancements. 
This agility allows us to direct 
our resources to focus on 
organic growth. 

We have a low capital intensity 
model, limited to off-the-
shelf software and hardware 
and capital spend typically 
represents 1%-1.5% of revenue 
(2021: 0.7% due to significant 
investment in prior year; 2020: 
2.8% due to IT investment 
during the pandemic).

The Group uses debt to fund acquisitions and purchase shares for the Employee Benefit Trusts and targets an operating leverage of 2-3 times net 
leverage, being the multiple of Adjusted EBITDA compared to Net Debt. The Group will consider the proforma performance of acquisition targets and 
may go beyond this target, subject to a strong de-levering profile thereafter.

8

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Strategic Report

Our Business

OUR PURPOSE – WHY DO WE EXIST?

In  an  increasingly  fast-moving,  complex,  and  uncertain  world,  it’s 
becoming more important for businesses and professionals to:

successfully predict and navigate the future; 

• 
•  make the right business decisions, at the right time; and
• 

effectively find, win, and keep customers.

We want to help our clients to decode the future, make better decisions, 
and reach more customers. We believe Information and Technology are 
forces for good.

ONE PLATFORM

GlobalData’s  One  Platform  model  is  the  foundation  of  our  strategic 
advantage and is the result of years of continuous capital investment, 
targeted acquisitions, and organic development.

Our unified model governs everything we do, from how we develop and 
manage our products, to our approach to sales and customer success, 
and supporting business operations.

At its core, this approach integrates our entire universe of unique data, 
expert  analysis,  and  innovative  solutions  into  One  Platform,  providing 
easy access to a complete and comparable view of the world’s largest 
industries.

As  a  result  of  our  unified  model, we  can  respond  rapidly to  changing 
customer  needs  and  market  opportunities,  and  continuously  manage 
and develop products quickly, at scale, with limited capital investment, 
as well as integrate acquisitions quickly and unlock synergies. 

GROWTH OPTIMISATION PLAN

We launched our Growth Optimisation Plan in 2020, and our clear focus 
is  on  sustainable  growth  delivered through four  key  pillars:  Customer 
Obsession,  World-Class  Product,  Sales  Excellence  and  Operational 
Agility.  The key word in this plan is “optimisation”, and what we mean by 
this is that we are not reliant on a single area of growth to be successful. 
We  have  multiple  levers for  growth,  both  in  our  organic  business  and 
through M&A opportunities.

Customer Obsession

• 

• 

Develop  a  trusted,  global  brand  synonymous  with 
delivering exceptional customer value and service;
Develop  a  global  community  of  engaged 
professionals; and

industry 

•  Maintain  a  customer-centric  culture  that  informs  our 

strategy, operating model, and business decisions.

World-Class Product

• 

• 

• 

Develop an integrated suite of winning propositions with 
clear competitive differentiation;
Provide  “must-have”  capabilities  that  are  integral  to  our 
clients and daily lives of professionals; and
Consistently  lead  the  market  in  commercialising  new 
product development and innovation. 

Sales Excellence

• 

• 

• 

targeted  campaigns  and 

Consistently  deliver  best-in-class  sales  productivity 
through 
tailored  sales 
enablement;
Provide new salespeople with the structured on-boarding 
support required to accelerate “time-to-target”; and
Invest in the technology, people, and processes required 
to  deliver  exceptional  experiences  across  the  customer 
journey.

Operational Agility

• 

• 

• 

Use  our  unified  operating  model  and  One  Platform  to 
create an integrated portfolio greater than the sum of its 
parts;
Ensure we have the organisational structure, capabilities 
(e.g. people, process, technology), and high-performance 
culture to execute; and
Provide effective portfolio-wide planning, business insight 
and performance reporting, and governance.

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

9

“Our Growth Optimisation Plan 
sets out the framework for 
growth and is underpinned by 
sustainability. We believe that 
Information and Technology 
are forces for good and our 
products and solutions can be 
a catalyst for positive change.”

Murray Legg, Chairman

Strategic Report

Chairman’s Statement

I  would,  firstly,  like  to  thank  all  of  my  colleagues  at  GlobalData 
and  congratulate  them  on  a  strong  set  of  results  and  continued 
execution of the Group’s strategy. Notwithstanding the continuing 
pressure  of  COVID-19,  we  have  delivered  another  year  of  strong 
organic  revenue  growth  and  welcomed  the  acquisitions  of  the 
Life Sciences business and the LMC Automotive and Agribusiness 
assets. While the timing of the acquisitions meant that the impact 
on  Income  Statement  earnings  for  FY21  was  immaterial,  the 
strengthening  of the  Group’s  capabilities  in these  sectors  gives  it 
greater scale and opportunity for accelerated momentum in 2022. 

As we progress the integration of the acquired businesses, we look 
forward to realising and leveraging the additional capabilities these 
assets  bring  to  the  Group  as  well  as  demonstrating  GlobalData’s 
value-added  content,  functionalities  and  tools  to  our  new 
customers.

Our Strategy
Our  strategy 
is  focused  on  growth.  Our  four-pillar  Growth 
Optimisation Plan is focused on achieving long-term, double-digit 
growth and making strategic, earnings-enhancing acquisitions.

Our Environmental, Social and Governance (ESG) activities focus on 
our people, our customers, our environment and our communities. 
These  activities  are  key  to  our  efforts  to  safeguard  GlobalData’s 
long-term viability and sustainable growth. We are setting out our 
strategy on sustainability and Corporate Social Responsibility; the 
activities that we are focusing on are strategically important to our 
organic growth. 

Our  Growth  Optimisation  Plan  sets  out  the  framework  for  growth 
and  is  underpinned  by  sustainability.  We  believe  that  Information 
and Technology are forces for good and our products and solutions 
can be a catalyst for positive change. ESG for us is basically about 
creating  a  great  company  with  great  people,  having  a  positive 
impact  on  the  world,  leveraging  the  proprietary  granular  data 
and insight that we have to help our clients understand their own 
impact and help them to develop long-term sustainable strategies. 
Further details on our ESG activities are set out in our ESG Report 
on page 47.

Since the formation  of  GlobalData  in  2016,  creating  a World-Class 
Product  has  been  our  primary  pillar  of  development.  We  have 
invested significant resource into the product and have created a 
real culture of innovation, product development and a strong focus 
on quality. Strategically, we are now broadening our focus to place 
Customer  Obsession  at  the  forefront  of  our  Growth  Optimisation 
Plan.

We  now  have  +4,600  clients,  and  further  embedding  our  data, 
insights,  tools  and  workflows  into  our  customers’  businesses 
represents an attractive opportunity for growth. The sophistication 
and breadth of our content means there are opportunities beyond 
the traditional departments that procure Information Services. We 
intend  to  get  to  know  our  clients  better,  listen  to  their  business 
problems and provide the solutions for them to succeed.

Board Composition
During  the  year  we  have  made  changes  to  the  composition  of 
the  Board  to  ensure  that  we  have  the  right  skills  and  diversity  of 
experience  to  support  and  guide  the  business  on  its  exciting 
trajectory. I would like to thank my predecessor, Bernard Cragg, for 
his significant contribution to building the position of strength that 
the Group is in. 

We  welcomed  Catherine  Birkett  and  Julien  Decot  as  new  Non-
Executive Directors, who together bring expertise on high-growth 
environments,  the  technology  sector  and  corporate  financing. 
Catherine  has  succeeded  me  as  Chair  of  the  Audit  Committee, 
and  we  appointed  Annette  Barnes  as  Chair  of  the  Remuneration 
Committee, succeeding Peter Harkness.

I believe that we have a strong group of Non-Executive Directors, 
each  with  an  excellent  track  record  of  success  and  real  diversity 
in their skills and experiences, who will provide valuable support to 
Mike Danson and Graham Lilley in executing our strategy. 

Dividend
For the financial year ended 31 December 2021, the Group operated 
a dividend policy whereby dividends grew in line with earnings, at an 
Adjusted EBITDA level. We are therefore pleased to propose a final 
dividend of 13.2 pence per share (2020: 11.6 pence). The proposed 
final dividend will be paid on 29 April 2022 to shareholders on the 
register  at the  close  of  business  on  1 April  2022. The  ex-dividend 
date will be on 31 March 2022. The proposed final dividend increases 
the total dividend for the year to 19.3 pence per share (2020: 17.0 
pence), an increase of 14%. 

Looking Forward
The Group’s business model is robust and scalable. We are confident 
we  can  continue  to  execute  our  strategy  and  that  the  Group  will 
continue  to  deliver  sustainable  organic  and  inorganic  growth  in 
2022 and in the longer term.

Murray Legg
Chairman  
28 February 2022

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

11

Chief Executive’s Report

“Our organic underlying 
Strategic Report
constant currency revenue 
performance was strong, 
and, importantly, we exit the 
year with improved forward 
revenue visibility. The greater 
visibility, driven by our organic 
growth performance and the 
two completed acquisitions, 
together with our disciplined 
approach to costs, gives the 
Group a strong foundation for 
accelerated growth and further 
margin expansion.”

 Mike Danson, Chief Executive Officer

12

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Strategic Report

Chief Executive’s Report

We have continued to expand our position as a leading intelligence 
platform  within  the  growing  Information  Services  market,  both 
through  our  organic  progress  and  the  two  M&A  transactions 
completed near the end of the year. 

In  2021  we  continued  to  invest  across  our  Growth  Optimisation 
Plan,  with  increasing  focus  on  Customer  Obsession,  our  number-
one  strategic  priority.  Our  organic  underlying  constant  currency 
revenue  performance  was  strong,  and,  importantly,  we  exit  the 
year with improved forward revenue visibility. The greater visibility, 
driven by our organic growth performance and the two completed 
acquisitions, together with our disciplined approach to costs, gives 
the Group a strong foundation for accelerated growth and further 
margin expansion.

The Group has delivered a strong set of results and has continued to 
deliver and execute against its strategy. Our 8% organic underlying 
constant  currency  revenue  growth  (6%  reported  revenue  growth) 
and  margin  expansion,  together  with  our  strengthening  visibility 
on deferred revenues, demonstrate clear progress against our two 
financial  targets  of  achieving  at  least  10%  annual  organic  growth 
and an Adjusted EBITDA margin of between 35%-40%. 

Our business model and the sector we are in give us a great platform 
for growth and significant resilience against wider macro-economic 
factors.  As  a  trusted  intelligence  provider,  our  products  and 
services historically benefit from increased usage and demand, as 
our customers look to successfully navigate periods of uncertainty. 
As a result, our subscription renewal rates have been consistently 
strong over the past two years and the heritage assets that we have 
consolidated in our One Platform, have a long-standing history of 
growth  during  economic  cycles.  We  are  confident  that  our  deep 
customer  relationships,  diverse  market  coverage  and  continued 
investment in must-have intelligence will maintain this position of 
strength and resilience. 

GROWTH OPTIMISATION PLAN

We  launched  our  Growth  Optimisation  Plan  in  2020,  and  our  clear 
focus  is  on  sustainable  growth  delivered  through  four  key  pillars: 
Customer  Obsession,  World-Class  Product,  Sales  Excellence  and 
Operational Agility.  The key word in this plan is “optimisation”, and 
what we mean by this is that we are not reliant on a single area of 
growth to be successful. We have multiple levers for growth, both in 
our organic business and through M&A opportunities.

• 

Organic growth: We have a clear strategy for organic growth 
and our multiple levers mean we are not reliant on a single area 
of growth. Our key levers for growth are: 

• 
• 
• 

• 

• 

Increase volume renewal rates;
Price increases;
 Selling more licences within the organisations we already 
serve;
 Product cross-sell opportunities within our existing client 
base; and
 Selling to new clients. We have +4,600 clients in an overall 
immediate addressable market of 125,000 companies.

We  have  made  progress  against  our  ambition  of  reaching 
annual  10%  organic  growth,  achieving  organic  underlying 
constant currency revenue growth of 8% and growth in organic 
underlying  constant  currency  invoiced  forward  revenues  of 
10%. The latter provides a strong foundation for growth in the 
current year. 

•  M&A: During the fourth quarter we completed two acquisitions: 
the  Life  Sciences  business, which  adds  drug  pricing  data,  as 
well  as  other  critical  Life  Sciences  data  and  analysis  to  our 
existing  world-class  pharmaceuticals  intelligence;  and  the 
LMC  Automotive  and  Agribusiness  information  businesses 
(together  “LMC”). The  integration  processes  are  ongoing  and 
on track. 

Both acquisitions represent strategic bolt-ons of data assets, 
which are reflective of our M&A strategy and our capability to 
integrate assets into our One Platform model efficiently. 

We  assess  potential  acquisitions  based  upon  our  investment 
criteria of:

• 

• 

• 
• 
• 

 Quality product/service that meets the definition of “gold 
standard” (demonstrated by strong renewal rates);
 Adds  depth to  an  existing vertical  or  gives  us  access to 
new  vertical/horizontal  data  sets  that  complement  our 
current coverage;
Recurring revenue and operating gearing;
Synergy opportunities; and
Global and scalable product.

We continue to have a strong pipeline of potential M&A targets, 
which we are actively progressing. 

The four pillars of our Growth Optimisation Plan:

Customer Obsession
Customer Obsession is central to our strategy. It runs through 
everything we do and we continue to focus on client needs and 
on providing unique and innovative solutions. 

We have several ongoing initiatives aimed at giving our clients 
world-class  solutions  delivered  with  exceptional  levels  of 
service. 

• 

Focused  on  our  top-tier  clients:  We  have  initiated  an 
ongoing  project  to  deepen  our  relationships  and  further 
embed  our  products  within  our  top-tier  clients.  This 
initiative  is  based  on  the  enhanced  collaboration  of  our 
sales teams,  analysts,  custom  research  consultants  and 
relationship/client  services  to  truly  put  our  clients  first. 
Aided  by  our  in-house  proprietary  technology  platform 
Customer360, which  pulls together  external  intelligence 
with  internal  metrics  on  usage,  the  team  has  been 
tasked  to  increase  our  understanding  of  our  clients  and 
demonstrate how our varied solutions can help our clients 
with the challenges they are facing and help them better 
succeed in their markets. 

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

13

The key focuses for the sales team in 2021 have been to deepen 
the  relationships with  our top  clients  and  execute  upsell  and 
cross-sell  opportunities,  increase  the  number  of  Multi-year 
Deals and penetrate new client opportunities.

As a business, we are continually focusing on making our sales 
efforts  as  efficient  as  possible.  During  2021,  we  started  to 
embed automation into our sales processes, and while this is 
only in its infancy for the business, it presents a real opportunity 
for growth going forward. This includes automated and client-
friendly  renewal  processes  as well  as  developing  a  sustained 
inbound lead pipeline. 

Operational Agility 
We have delivered strong organic growth and executed well on 
M&A during 2021 within our existing cost structure. Our ability 
to maintain a relatively fixed cost base, while having the agility 
to allocate resources for growth and product development, is a 
core asset of our business model. This is demonstrated by the 
margin progression from 32% to 34%.

In addition to our existing solutions, our One Platform approach 
to our product offering places us in a relatively unique position 
for potential M&A. Our proprietary platform allows us to review 
M&A  opportunities  with  the  confidence  that  we  can  ‘plug  in’ 
and integrate new data sets effectively and execute at speed. 
Regardless of whether the acquisition is an enhancement to an 
existing  vertical  sector  or  represents  an  expansion  into  an 
adjacent  market,  the  platform  software,  data  taxonomy  and 
architecture will add significant value to any acquired business.

DIVIDEND

Having regard to the financial performance in 2021, cash generation 
and  future  prospects,  the  Board  is  pleased  to  propose  a  final 
dividend of 13.2 pence per share (2020: 11.6 pence). The proposed 
final dividend will be paid on 29 April 2022 to shareholders on the 
register  at the  close  of  business  on  1 April  2022. The  ex-dividend 
date will be on 31 March 2022.  The proposed final dividend increases 
the total  dividend for the year to  19.3  pence  per  share  (2020:  17.0 
pence), an increase of 14%.

Strategic Report

Chief Executive’s Report

• 

• 

Use of client-focused technology: We have also developed 
a proprietary technology tool, ‘Intelligraph’, which gathers 
data on all our clients and delivers key insights into their 
business needs and product requirements. This allows us 
to better serve all our clients and provide timely solutions 
to the matters of highest priority to our clients.

Increased  investment  in  customer  service:  Over  the 
past  18  months we  have  significantly  increased the  size 
of  our  customer  success  and  relationship  management 
teams. Since June 2020, we have nearly doubled the size 
of  this  team  to  111,  demonstrating  our  commitment  to 
service excellence.

World-Class Products
The core value to our clients is the unique and proprietary “gold 
standard” data. We continue to develop our capabilities within 
each  individual  vertical,  to  maintain  quality  and  enhance 
existing data sets.

We  continued  to  enhance  our  cross-vertical  use  of  business 
(e.g.  Companies,  Deals,  News,  Macro-
fundamentals 
economics),  proprietary  thematic  and  ESG  intelligence,  and 
expand  our 
innovative  horizontal  “Alternative”  data  and 
analytics. As  part  of the  integration  of the  Life  Sciences  and 
LMC businesses, these valuable insight tools will be integrated 
into their core offering as part of our One Platform to enrich the 
existing  gold  standard  data  consumed  by  their  client  base. 
These integrated capabilities help to differentiate our products 
in the  marketplace  by  providing  our  clients with  a  richer  and 
more complete intelligence offering.

We have also increased our focus on our free-to-access B2B 
industry  websites  and  are  using  our  platform  and  data  to 
enhance  our  network  of  sites  at  speed  and  scale.  Our 
proprietary  data  and  insights  give  us  the  unique  platform  to 
create differentiated editorial content and data journalism.  As 
a  result  of  this,  we  have  developed  a  global  audience  of 
engaged professionals, with many of our sites now in the Top-3 
within their segment for traffic, which is key for increasing our 
overall brand awareness.

We have increased our focus on our custom solutions offering 
to  drive  additional  engagement  and  deliver  additional,  high-
value  solutions  for  our  clients  which  complement  the 
subscription service. We can now see some early demonstrable 
success  within  this  team,  with  revenue  growth  of  16% 
compared  to  2020.  We  see  custom  solutions  as  a  key  driver 
towards greater penetration within our existing clients, which 
will  help  us  increase  the  value  of  existing  clients,  creating 
larger accounts.

Sales Excellence
Our  sales  teams  have  performed  well  during  2021  with  good 
growth  momentum  demonstrated  in  the  closing  invoiced 
forward revenue and deferred revenue numbers (10% and 9% 
in organic underlying constant currency growth, respectively).

14

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Strategic Report

Chief Executive’s Report

TRADING PERFORMANCE 

Revenue  –  Renewal  rates  remained  strong  throughout  2021  and 
have  been  consistent  across  the  past  three  years,  which  give  us 
confidence in the defensibility of our product and its resilience in a 
tough macro-economic environment.

On an organic underlying constant currency basis, revenue grew by 
8%, which was driven in large part by underlying constant currency 
growth  in  subscriptions  of  8%  augmented  with  strong  growth  in 
bespoke solutions as we strengthened our client relationships. 

We  had  strong  sales  order  momentum  in the  last  quarter  of  2021, 
resulting in invoiced forward revenue growth of 10% on an organic 
underlying  constant  currency  basis  (16%  reported),  meaning  that 
we start 2022 with significantly enhanced visibility on our revenues.

Cost  base  –  We  have  an  established  cost  base,  which  has  a 
significant amount of growth and product development investment 
embedded.  This  means  that  we  do  not  need  to  incrementally 
increase our cost base significantly, in monetary terms, to invest in 
new initiatives and growth opportunities. Therefore, our operating 
costs grew only 3% to £124.9m (2020: £121.7m) and resulted in drop 
through Adjusted EBITDA margin of 71%. 

Net Debt – During the year we have extended our banking facilities 
by exercising the £75m accordion facility and extending by a further 
£20m. We have been well supported by our banks in executing our 
M&A  strategy,  in which we  have  invested  £97.7m  during  2021. We 
have also invested £46.5m supporting our Employee Benefit Trust 
to buy shares for our employee LTIP, in order to satisfy the upcoming 
share awards that are due to vest.

Our current financing facility has further headroom of £18m as at  
28 February 2022, in addition to the Group cash reserves of ~£40m 
as  of  the  same  date.  Although  the  facility  expires  in  the  second 
quarter of 2023, we are in advanced discussions to refinance and 
obtain  a  new facility that  supports the  Group’s  M&A  strategy  over 
the longer term.

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

15

Strategic Report

Chief Executive’s Report

FINANCIAL KEY PERFORMANCE INDICATORS

The financial KPIs below are used, in addition to statutory reporting measures, by the Executive Directors to monitor the Group’s 
performance and progress. 

2021 

2020

% reported growth

% organic growth

Revenue

£189.3m

£178.4m

6%

5%

Invoiced 
Forward Revenue

Adjusted EBITDA

Adjusted EBITDA  
 Margin

£107.7m

£92.7m

16%

9%

£64.4m

£56.7m

14%

13%

34%

32%

2p.p.

2p.p.

Net Debt1

£177.6m

£58.1m

206%

206%

Note 1: Net Debt: Short- and long-term borrowings (excluding lease liabilities) less cash and cash equivalents.

We have continued to make strong progress against these KPIs.  

Revenue growth on an organic underlying constant currency basis 
was 8%, with immaterial growth from M&A completed in the latter 
part  of  the  year.  Our  revenues  were 
impacted  by  currency 
fluctuations  in the year,  mainly  due to volatility  between  GBP  and 
US Dollar.

Overall  our  revenue  visibility  has  grown,  with  invoiced  forward 
revenue growth of 16%. On an organic underlying constant currency 
basis,  invoiced  forward  revenue  growth  was  10%,  demonstrating 
the strong growth in sales orders towards the end of the financial 
year. 

Our  business  model  is  scalable  and  benefits  from  significant 
incremental margin benefits. Last year we stated our ambition was 
to achieve Adjusted EBITDA margin of between 35% and 40%, and 
we  have  made  further  progress  towards  this  by  increasing  our 
margin by two percentage points to 34% and expect to continue the 
current trajectory of margin expansion. The incremental margin on 
the revenue growth in 2021 was 71%.

Our  disciplined  approach  to  costs  and  the  benefits  of  our 
subscription model give us confidence that we will be in our target 
range over the course of the next 12 months.

Our Net Debt has increased during 2021 as a result of investment in 
M&A and the purchase of shares for our Employee Benefit Trust. As 
at  31  December  2021  the  Net  Leverage  was  2.76  being  Net  Debt 
divided  by Adjusted  EBITDA  (2020:  1.02). The  Group targets  a  Net 
Leverage  operating  range  of  between  2-3  times,  but  will  also 
consider the proforma (pre-acquisition) performance of acquisition 
targets and going beyond this target, subject to a strong de-levering 
profile thereafter. 

Outlook for 2022
We  are  well  positioned  as  a  business  to  make  further  progress  in 
2022. Underpinned by our strong invoiced forward revenue position 
of  £107.7m  at the  start  of the  new financial year  and  largely fixed 
cost base driving margin expansion, together with tailwinds which 
continue  to  drive  information  services  sector  growth  and  further 
M&A opportunity, we look forward to strong organic revenue growth 
and continued margin improvement in 2022.

We acknowledge the continuing economic impact of COVID-19, but 
we  are  confident  in  our  business  model  and  the  sector  we  are  in 
provides us with both the resilience and the opportunity to excel in 
otherwise tough market conditions. We are confident that our deep 
customer  relationships,  diverse  market  coverage  and  continued 
investment in must-have intelligence will maintain this position of 
strength and resilience. 

People  
The strong set of results that we have delivered is underpinned by 
the talent and dedication of the GlobalData team. I want to thank all 
my  GlobalData  colleagues  for  their  efforts  during  2021,  and  I  also 
would  like  to  welcome  the  new  colleagues  who  have  joined  the 
Group with the Life Sciences and LMC acquisitions. I look forward to 
sharing further successes together during 2022 and beyond.

I  am  also  delighted  that  many  of  our  colleagues  will  be  able  to 
exercise  their  share  options,  now  that  the  business  has  achieved 
the final vesting target  of  £52m Adjusted  EBITDA  (pre-IFRS16),  in 
our  Scheme  1  LTIP.    These  awards  will  be  settled  from  existing 
shares  held  in  the  Group’s  EBT  schemes.  JP  Morgan,  Panmure 
Gordon and Singer Capital Markets have been appointed to handle 
any resulting share sales by the EBT schemes in due course.

Board 
As previously noted, Murray Legg was appointed as Non-Executive 
Chairman at the Annual General Meeting in April 2021 and we have 
also  welcomed  two  new  Non-Executives  to  the  Board  in  2021. 
Catherine Birkett joined the Board on 20 April 2021 and succeeded 
Murray as the Audit Committee Chair, and Julien Decot joined the 
Board  on  30  April  2021.  As  a  Board,  I  think  we  have  significant 
strength  and  capabilities  within  our  Non-Executive  team  and  I 
thank them all for their insight, advice and challenge over the past 
year and look forward to their continued support in 2022.

Mike Danson
Chief Executive Officer
28 February 2022

16

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Chief Executive’s Report

“We have a clear strategy  
Strategic Report
for organic growth and our 
multiple levers mean we are not 
reliant on a single area of growth. 
Our key levers for growth are: 
• Increase volume renewal rates; 
• Price increases; 
•  Selling more licences within the 
organisations we already serve; 
•  Product cross-sell opportunities 

within our existing client base; and 

•  Selling to new clients. We have 

+4,600 clients in an overall 
immediate addressable market  
of 125,000 companies.”

 Mike Danson, Chief Executive Officer

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

17

Strategic Report

Chief Financial Officer’s Report

£m

Revenue

Operating profit

Adjusting items

Depreciation

Amortisation of acquired intangible assets

Amortisation of software

Share-based payments charge

Restructuring and refinancing costs

Revaluation loss/(gain) on short- and long-term derivatives

Unrealised operating foreign exchange gains

M&A costs

Adjusted EBITDA

Adjusted EBITDA margin1

Statutory Profit Before Tax

Amortisation of acquired intangible assets

Share-based payments charge

Restructuring and refinancing costs

Revaluation loss/(gain) on short- and long-term derivatives

Unrealised operating foreign exchange gains

M&A costs

Adjusted Profit Before Tax

Adjusted income tax expense2

Adjusted Profit After Tax

Cash Flow Analysis

Cash flow generated from operations

Cash flow conversion %3

Earnings Performance

Profit After Tax

Adjusted Profit After Tax

Basic shares (millions)

Diluted shares (millions)

Attributable to equity holders:

Basic earnings per share (pence)

Diluted earnings per share (pence)

Adjusted basic earnings per share (pence)

Adjusted diluted earnings per share (pence)

Year Ended
31 December 2021

Year Ended
31 December 2020

189.3

38.2

6.8

5.6

0.9

9.2

1.4

0.9

(1.0)

2.4

64.4

34%

32.6

5.6

9.2

1.4

0.9

(1.0)

2.4

51.1

(9.4)

41.7

60.5

94%

24.9

41.7

113.5

123.0

21.9

20.2

36.7

33.9

178.4

33.0

7.0

10.7

1.1

4.2

0.6

(0.3)

(0.3)

0.7

56.7

32%

28.6

10.7

4.2

0.6

(0.3)

(0.3)

0.7

44.2

(8.4)

35.8

59.8

105%

22.6

35.8

116.2

124.8

19.4

18.1

30.8

28.7

1 Adjusted EBITDA margin is defined as: Adjusted EBITDA as a percentage of revenue. Note 2 discloses the rationale for the adjusting items in detail.

2 Adjusted income tax expense represents the statutory income tax expense adjusted for the tax effect on adjusting items. In addition, the adjusted income 

tax expense includes the effect of any tax rate changes.

3 Cash flow conversion is defined as: Cash flow generated from operations divided by Adjusted EBITDA.

18

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Strategic Report

Chief Financial Officer’s Report

The  financial  position  and  performance  of the  business  are  reflective  of the  core  financial  elements  of  our  business  model: visible  and 
recurring  revenues,  high  incremental  margins,  scalable  opportunity  and  strong  cash flows. The  Directors  use  statutory  profit  measures 
to assess business performance but also believe that Adjusted EBITDA, Adjusted profit after tax and Adjusted earnings per share provide 
additional useful information on the core operational performance of the Group to shareholders, and we review the results of the Group 
using these measures internally. 

THE GROUP’S PERFORMANCE THIS YEAR

1. Revenue
Overall revenue grew by 6% to £189.3m (2020: £178.4m). Organic underlying constant currency growth was 8%, which was driven by strong 
performance in subscriptions, which grew by 8% on an organic underlying constant currency basis and was augmented by strong growth 
in bespoke research solutions. Acquisitions contributed ~1% to the overall growth rate.

Currency volatility reduced underlying constant currency performance with a 3% headwind, driven in the main by volatility between GBP 
and US Dollar, with the pound strengthening on average by 8% (2021: 1.38; 2020: 1.28).

2. Profit before tax
Profit  before tax for the year  grew  by  £4.0m to  £32.6m  (2020:  £28.6m), which  partly  reflects the  operating  leverage which  has  driven 
Adjusted EBITDA to grow by £7.7m to £64.4m (2020: £56.7m), offset with increases in other operating costs.

£m

Revenue

Operating costs

Adjusted EBITDA

Depreciation

Amortisation of acquired intangible assets

Amortisation of software

Share-based payments charge

Restructuring and refinancing costs

Revaluation (loss)/gain on short- and long-term derivatives

Unrealised operating foreign exchange gains

M&A costs

Finance costs

Profit Before Tax

Year Ended
31 December 2021

Year Ended
31 December 2020

Change %

189.3

(124.9)

64.4

(6.8)

(5.6)

(0.9)

(9.2)

(1.4)

(0.9)

1.0

(2.4)

(5.6)

32.6

178.4

(121.7)

56.7

(7.0)

(10.7)

(1.1)

(4.2)

(0.6)

0.3

0.3

(0.7)

(4.4)

28.6

6%

3%

14%

(3%)

(48%)

(18%)

119%

133%

(400%)

233%

243%

27%

14%

Adjusted EBITDA
Adjusted EBITDA increased by 14% to £64.4m (2020: £56.7m). The growth in Adjusted EBITDA was driven by our strong revenue growth and 
our ability to control what is a relatively fixed cost base.  

We have an established cost base, which has a significant amount of growth and product development investment embedded. This means 
that  we  do  not  need  to  incrementally  increase  our  cost  base,  in  monetary  terms,  significantly  to  invest  in  new  initiatives  and  growth 
opportunities.  Therefore,  our  operating  costs  grew  only  3%  to  £124.9m  (2020:  £121.7m)  and  resulted  in  drop  through  Adjusted  EBITDA 
margin of 71%. Our overall margin increased by 2 percentage points to 34% (2020: 32%). 

Other operating costs
Other operating costs grew by 13% in total, but there are some significant individual movements of note:

• 

• 

The  amortisation  charge  for  acquired  intangibles  has  declined  by  £5.1m  to  £5.6m  (2020:  £10.7m).  This  is  reflective  of  assets 
becoming fully amortised, along with recent M&A activity being phased towards the end of the year. The acquisitions made in the 
latter part of 2021 had an immaterial effect on 2021’s charge but will increase the charge for 2022 and future years. 
The  share-based  payment  charge  has  increased  from  £4.2m  to  £9.2m  in  2021  (an  increase  of  £5.0m).  This  was  the  result  of 
vesting forecast changes in 2020, which impacted the spread of charge and therefore the cost in 2020 was particularly low. 

•  M&A costs were minimal in 2020, and 2021 included costs associated with the acquisitions completed.

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

19

 
Strategic Report

Chief Financial Officer’s Report

• 

Financing costs increased by 27%, reflecting the increase in drawn facility in the year. The drawn facilities were mainly in relation 
to the M&A which happened in the latter part of the year and therefore we expect a full year effect of the increase in Net Debt to 
be reflected in the financing cost line in 2022.

Leases
Within our operating costs, depreciation in relation to right-of-use assets was £5.0m (2020: £5.6m). Other income, in relation to sub-let 
income on right-of-use assets, was £0.4m (2020: £1.3m). Our net finance costs include interest of £1.5m in relation to lease liabilities (2020: 
£1.7m).

3. Cash Generation
Cash generated from operations grew by 1.0% to £60.5m (2020: £59.8m), representing 94% of Adjusted EBITDA (2020: 105%). We would 
normally expect operating cash flow to be in excess of 100% of Adjusted EBITDA and if we add back exceptional cash costs in the year 
(restructuring, refinancing and M&A), cash flow conversion is ~100%.

Capital expenditure was £1.3m in 2021 (2020: £5.0m), including £0.5m on software (2020: £1.5m). There was an uplift in capital expenditure 
in 2020, reflecting significant investment into the Group’s computer hardware and cyber-security systems. The 2021 levels (0.7% of revenue) 
reflect a return to a normalised state.

Total cash flows from operating activities was £52.0m (growth of £1.0m from 2020), which represented 136% of operating profit (2020: 
155%). During the year, the Group paid out £20.4m in dividends (2020: £18.0m).

Short-  and  long-term  borrowings  increased  by  £124.4m  (inclusive  of  a  £5.0m  repayment)  to  £200.2m  as  at  31  December  2021  (2020: 
£75.8m). The debt drawn was focused on two main areas of expenditure:

•  M&A – The Group purchased the Life Sciences business and the LMC Automotive and Agribusiness assets for combined cash 
consideration of £96.7m. In addition, £1.0m was paid in relation to two deferred consideration amounts from prior acquisitions. 
The cash costs of acquisitions are set out on page 123.   

• 

Purchase  of  shares  through  Employee  Benefit  Trust  –  The  Group  purchased  2.9m  shares  for  its  employee  LTIP  for  net 
consideration of £46.5m.

4. Net Debt
Net Debt increased to £177.6m as at 31 December 2021 (2020: £58.1m). This increase principally reflects strong operating cash flows, offset 
by M&A activity of £97.7m, contributions to the Employee Benefit Trust to buy-back shares of £46.5m, dividends of £20.4m and capital 
expenditure of £1.3m.

The Group defines Net Debt as short- and long-term borrowings (note 20) less cash and cash equivalents. The amount excludes items 
related to leases.

£m

Short- and long-term borrowings (note 20)

Cash

Net Debt

2021

200.2

(22.6)

177.6

2020

75.8

(17.7)

58.1

5. Invoiced forward revenue
Invoiced forward revenues grew by 16% from the 31 December 2020 balance of £92.7m to £107.7m, reflecting good momentum on sales 
orders in the final quarter of 2021 (organic underlying constant currency growth of 10%) and the impact of acquisitions. Invoiced forward 
revenue is a major component of our significant revenue visibility for the forthcoming year. 

£m

Deferred revenue (note 19)

Amounts not due/subscription not started at 31 December

Invoiced forward revenue

2021

81.4

26.3

107.7

2020

74.7

18.0

92.7

20

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Strategic Report

Chief Financial Officer’s Report

6. Intangible assets
Intangible assets have increased by £105.7m during the year, from £242.0m as at 31 December 2020, to £347.7m as at 31 December 2021. 
The majority of the increase relates to two acquisitions made during the year of Life Sciences and LMC in which the Group recognised 
goodwill and intangibles assets on acquisition of £37.8m and £73.8m respectively. Offsetting against these increases was an amortisation 
charge for the year of £6.5m (2020: £11.8m). 

7. Trade receivables
Net trade receivables as at 31 December 2021 were £42.3m, representing a 17% growth compared with the 31 December 2020 balance of 
£36.2m. Of the 2021 balance, £1.4m related to LMC and £1.2m related to Life Sciences, therefore organic trade receivables totalled £39.7m, 
representing organic growth of 10%.

8. Foreign exchange impact on results
The Group derives around 60% of revenues in currencies other than Sterling, compared with around 40% of its cost base. The impact of 
currency movements in the year reduced revenue by £5.7m (2020: positive £0.3m), which represented a headwind of around 3% on growth. 
The full impact on Adjusted EBITDA was offset by £4.8m of currency benefits on costs, resulting in overall £0.9m of adverse impact on 
earnings at an Adjusted EBITDA level. 

£m

As reported

Less impact of acquisitions

Add back currency movements

US Dollar

Euro

Other

Organic underlying constant currency

2020

Organic underlying constant currency growth

Revenue

189.3

(1.5)

5.1

0.2

0.4

193.5

178.4

8%

Costs

(124.9)

1.1

(3.5)

-

(1.3)

(128.6)

(121.7)

6%

     Adjusted 
EBITDA

64.4

(0.4)

1.6

0.2

(0.9)

64.9

56.7

14%

Margin

34%

34%

32%

2% p.p.

The  main  driver for the  movement was the fluctuation throughout the year  of  Pounds  Sterling  in  comparison to  US  Dollar.  In  2021 the 
average rate throughout the year was 1.38 compared to an average rate of 1.28 in 2020.

9. Earnings per share
Basic EPS was 21.9 pence per share (2020: 19.4 pence per share). Fully diluted profit per share was 20.2 pence per share (2020: 18.1 pence 
per share). 

Adjusted earnings per share grew from 30.8 pence per share to 36.7 pence, representing 19% growth.

10. Dividends
We are pleased to propose a final dividend of 13.2 pence per share (2020: 11.6 pence). The proposed final dividend will be paid on 29 April 
2022 to shareholders on the register at the close of business on 1 April 2022. The ex-dividend date will be on 31 March 2022.  The proposed 
final dividend increases the total dividend for the year to 19.3 pence per share (2020: 17.0 pence), an increase of 14%. 

11. Taxation
The Group’s effective tax rate for the reporting period is 23.6%.  This exceeds the current UK corporation tax rate of 19.0%, which is broadly 
due to: the impact of higher tax rates in certain overseas jurisdictions where the Group operates, specifically the United States and India; 
incurring expenses that are non-deductible for tax purposes; and remeasuring certain deferred tax assets and liabilities at 25.0%, reflecting 
the change in UK tax rate to be effective from 1 April 2023.

Key factors that may impact the Group’s future tax charge as a percentage of underlying profits are: the mix of profits and losses between 
the jurisdictions in which the Group operates and the corresponding tax rates in those territories; the impact of non-deductible expenditure 
and non-taxable income; and the utilisation (with a corresponding reduction in cash tax payments) of previously unrecognised deferred 
tax assets. 

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

21

Strategic Report

Chief Financial Officer’s Report

FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT

The Group’s primary objective in managing foreign currency risk is to protect against the risk that the eventual Sterling net cash flows will be 
affected by changes in foreign currency exchange rates. To do this, the Group enters into foreign exchange contracts that limit the risk from 
movements in US Dollar and Euro exchange rates with Sterling. Due to the Group’s operations in India, the Group also enters into foreign 
exchange contracts that limit the risk from movements in US Dollars with the Indian Rupee exchange rate. While commercially and from a 
cash flow perspective this hedges the Group’s currency exposures, the Group elects not to apply hedge accounting and accordingly any 
movements in the fair value of the foreign exchange contracts are recognised in the income statement.

As a data and analytics company, we are not currently impacted by cross-border tariffs and we do not currently expect the renegotiation of 
tariffs to materially impact our business. Furthermore, the company is continuing to monitor the Inclusive Framework Project established by 
the OECD, including Pillar One (determining where tax should be paid and on what basis) and Pillar Two (the design of a system that ensures 
multinational enterprises pay a minimum level of tax), which is expected to be in effect from mid-2023 onwards. However, the application 
thresholds will be aimed at the very largest companies, and therefore the rules are unlikely to impact the Group. 

INTEREST RATE RISK

Interest rate risk is the impact that fluctuations in market interest rates can have on the value of the Group’s interest-bearing assets and 
liabilities and on the interest charge recognised in the income statement. The Group does not manage this risk with the use of derivatives.

IBOR reform refers to the global reform of interest rate benchmarks, which includes the replacement of some interbank offered rates (IBOR) 
with alternative benchmark rates. The Group has performed an impact review to assess which balances have been impacted as a result of 
IBOR reform, concluding that external borrowings is the only area affected by the change. During the year, the Group has agreed with the 
syndicated loan providers to rebase the risk-free rate from LIBOR to SONIA. This change has occurred purely as a result of IBOR reform and 
has occurred on an economically equivalent basis, i.e. neither the Group nor the bank have gained or lost from the amendment to the loan 
facility agreement. Due to these circumstances, a practical expedient as permitted under IFRS 9 “Financial Instruments” has been applied 
whereby the change is not classified as a modification, it is instead accounted for by amending the effective interest rate of the loan. There 
have been no changes to the Group’s risk management strategy as a result of this change.

LIQUIDITY RISK AND GOING CONCERN

The Group’s approach to managing liquidity risk is to ensure, as far as possible, that it has sufficient liquidity to meet its liabilities as they fall 
due, with surplus facilities to cope with any unexpected variances in timing of cash flows. The Group meets its day-to-day working capital 
requirements through free cash flow, being operations generated cash (with no external financing required). Although the statement of 
financial position shows net current liabilities (current assets less current liabilities), included in current liabilities is £81.4m of deferred 
revenue that represents future income earnings. Excluding deferred revenue, the Group has net current assets of £27.8m (2020: £28.9m).

Based on cash flow projections, the Group considers the existing financing facilities to be adequate to meet short-term commitments. The 
Directors have a reasonable expectation that there are no material uncertainties that cast significant doubt about the Group’s ability to 
continue in operation and meet its liabilities as they fall due for the foreseeable future, being a period of at least 12 months from the date of 
approval of the financial statements. Accordingly, the Group has prepared the Annual Report and Accounts on a going concern basis.  The 
Directors have prepared a Going Concern and Long-Term Viability statement on pages 34-35, within the Strategic Report.

Graham Lilley 
Chief Financial Officer
28 February 2022

22

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Chief Financial Officer’s Report

“The financial position and 
Strategic Report
performance of the business 
are reflective of the core 
financial elements of our 
business model: visible  
and recurring revenues,  
high incremental margins, 
scalable opportunity and 
strong cash flows.”

Graham Lilley, Chief Financial Officer

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

23

Strategic Report

Principal and Emerging Risks and Uncertainties

GlobalData’s  mission  is to  help  our  clients  decode the future to  become  more  successful  and  innovative,  by  providing  high-value  data, 
analytics, and insights.

The Group provides services across a breadth of industry markets and functions, on a global scale and on One Platform. We have a clear 
philosophy of owning our own data and intellectual property, and seek to be a long-term, strategic partner to our clients, by serving their 
critical activities with a differentiated, “gold standard” offering. 

Our Approach to Risk Management
The Group recognises that in order to be successful, we are required to take risks. However, risks need to be taken in a controlled environment. 
Our approach is one of responsible risk-taking in line with the principles, culture, tolerance and appetite as directed by the Board. Over the 
past three years, our approach to risk management has matured, developing over time to better serve the needs of a fast-growing business. 

The Group Risk Management has three key components:

•  A Risk Appetite Statement: This provides a high-level indication of how much risk GlobalData is willing to take, accept or tolerate 
in achieving its strategic goals and objectives. The Board sets the Group’s risk appetite and reviews at least annually. In doing so, 
the Board considers our strategic objectives, the Group’s principal risks and uncertainties and assesses against the long-term 
viability of the Group.

•  A three lines of defence model on internal controls: (first line: functions that own and manage risk; second line: functions that 
oversee  and  specialise  in  compliance; third  line:  independent  assurance). This  model  details the  key  internal  controls,  policies 
and assurance the Group has in its risk management processes, as well as those accountable and responsible for their operation. 
•  Our risk management processes and tools: These include an Annual Risk Assessment, assessment of internal controls and review 
of the control environment. The Board also considers the views of the Executive Management and Audit Committees as part of its 
systematic review of internal controls.

The below chart reflects the roles and responsibilities within our risk management processes. 

The Board

s

Review and Confirmation
The Board’s responsibility is to review and approve the Group’s 
strategy and objectives. The Board determines the Group’s 
appetite for risk and evaluates the Group’s risk management 
processes and internal controls.

Audit Committee

Challenge and Review
Risks are reviewed by the Audit Committee alongside internal 
controls for ongoing adequacy of operating effectiveness.

Executive Management 
Committee

Ongoing Review, Control and Implementation
The Executive Management Committee is responsible  
for day-to-day ownership of risk management and  
internal controls.

The Audit Committee monitors the adequacy and effectiveness of internal control and risk management systems and ensures that a robust 
assessment of the principal risks facing the Group has been undertaken.

Our Approach to Identifying the Principal Risks
The principal risks and uncertainties identified in the Report are those categories of risk which are considered by the Board to be material to 
the Group’s strategic development, performance and future prospects as well as Group operations. While the categories have not materially 
changed since our last Annual Report, the risk factors have evolved and we have set out in the report how these have changed in the year. 
In setting out the principal risks, the Board considers the net impact of mitigations and controls in place. The identified principal risks are not 
the only risks facing the business but are considered to have a material impact on the business, and therefore are the focus of discussion 
at Board and Audit Committee meetings.

24

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Strategic Report

Principal and Emerging Risks and Uncertainties

Annual Risk Assessment
At least annually, the Executive Management Committee reviews the Group’s principal risks and performs a risk assessment. The assessment 
considers both the existing principal risks as well as potential emerging risks of the Group. The assessment looks at both the likelihood of a 
risk event occurring and the impact that would have on the Group and the controls and mitigations the Group has in place.

The assessment as at 31 December 2021 has concluded that there are no new principal risks that have emerged during the year. COVID-19 has 
impacted the assessment of principal risks across the Group but does not equate to a principal risk on its own. The assessment of principal 
risks highlights where we believe COVID-19 has had an impact.

We are a data and analytics company in which our products are created and distributed digitally. Our carbon footprint is considerably smaller than 
for many other companies of our size. Therefore, we have concluded that environmental factors do not represent a principal risk to our business. 

Principal Risks
The principal risks and uncertainties reported are not the only risks facing the business but are those which the Board considers to be 
material to the Group. The Directors consider that the principal and emerging risks and uncertainties facing the Group are: 

Risk likelihood and impact:

d
o
o
h

i
l

e
k
L

i

Economic and Political
Personal Data

People and Succession

Competition and clients
Merger and Acquisition
Product

IT and cyber security

Regulatory and Compliance

Financial and Treasury

Business and Strategic risks: 

Impact

Risk Description Link to 

Potential Impact

Key Mitigations and Controls

Assessment

G.O.P.

1, 2

Product: 
The success 
of the Group is 
dependent on 
the quality and 
relevance of our 
products.

Our vision to 
become the 
world’s trusted 
source of strategic 
industry data, 
analytics, and 
insights means 
that our content 
must be of the 
highest quality to 
help our clients 
be successful. A 
reduction in quality 
could result in a 
loss of reputation, 
resulting in a loss 
of revenues from 
new and renewable 
business.

•  Regular product and research planning 
meetings consolidate client feedback, 
competitive positioning and new product 
development to ensure relevance and drive 
innovation.

•  Standard Process Manuals set out 
consistent research and publishing 
procedures, which focus on quality and 
accuracy and are continually reviewed for 
best practice.
Internal Quality team independently checks 
compliance against Standard Process 
Manuals.

• 

•  External Audit of Standard Process  

• 

Manual compliance.
Internal production targets are set relating 
to metrics such as timeliness and monitored 
against performance metrics.

•  Review of KPI metrics such as renewal rates 
and audience numbers on B2B media sites.

Overall
The product is very well 
diversified and offers 
significantly more breadth 
than rival products. The 
Group continually looks 
for innovation to enhance 
capability and client 
experience. We have 
implemented enhanced 
quality and process controls 
during the year.

COVID-19
No impact on updating 
and maintaining product, 
but the Group continues 
to provide our clients with 
real-time insights into how 
the pandemic is affecting 
their markets.

Risk Movement
Stable.

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

25

Strategic Report

Principal and Emerging Risks and Uncertainties

Business and Strategic risks (continued):

Link to 
G.O.P.

1,2,3,4

Risk Description

People and 
Succession: 
The Group is a 
people-based 
business; failure 
to attract or 
retain key 
employees could 
seriously impede 
future growth.

Failure to recruit 
or retain key 
staff could lead 
to reduced 
innovation and 
progress in the 
business.

Potential Impact

Key Mitigations and Controls

Assessment

The Group actively manages its talent and 
ensures that there are succession plans for its 
Board and Executive Management Committee.
•  The Group operates a competitive 

remuneration package, with competitive 
commission and incentive schemes. 
•  Experienced management team with 
a robust on-boarding programme for 
salespeople, which allows talented and 
motivated employees to flourish.

•  Monitoring of succession plans at Board, 

Executive and team levels.

•  Long-Term Incentive Plans with over 100 

senior management participants.
•  The introduction of a new Long-Term 

Incentive Plan to retain the top level of the 
Executive throughout the next 5-year plan.
•  Employee engagement initiatives through 

Employee Resource Groups and engagement 
with employee-focused Non-Executive 
Director. 

The Group operates across a range of industry 
verticals and across the globe; therefore it has 
a broad range of clients and competitors. One 
of the Group’s unique selling points is not only 
the breadth of its coverage, but also its depth. 
Therefore, it has to ensure that the depth of 
industry content is competitive and comparable 
to its competition in that sector.
•  The Group routinely reviews the competitive 
landscape to identify potential threats and 
acquisition opportunities.

•  We monitor our customer usage metrics and 
actively seek feedback from our clients in 
order to improve the services and customer 
experience.

•  We constantly monitor new technology 

capabilities and innovation to ensure that 
our products are always contemporary and 
relevant, which allows us to respond to new 
competitive threats as they arise.

•  Our data sets and technology platforms are 

both unique and difficult to replicate.

•  We aim to embed our products and services 
in client organisations, thereby increasing 
switching costs.

•  We provide improved and best-in-class 

client support, thereby improving customer 
satisfaction and retention.

Overall
We have maintained a stable 
senior management team, 
but market conditions have 
made the recruitment and 
retention of junior roles 
in sales and research and 
analysis more challenging.

COVID-19
Remote working has provided 
its challenges, but we quickly 
adapted and increased our 
focus on our employees’ 
well-being and their ability to 
perform their roles remotely. 
We have adapted our on-
boarding programmes to be 
effective in remote scenarios 
and conducted online.

Risk Movement
Increased risk due to  
tougher recruitment  
market conditions.

Overall
The first of our Growth 
Optimisation Pillars is 
customer-centricity and 
we continue to focus on 
exceeding our clients’ 
expectations. Our renewal 
rates have remained 
consistently high during  
the year. 

COVID-19
Our unique position as a 
multi-sector information 
services provider has 
enabled us to leverage our 
different sector expertise 
to provide our clients with 
unrivalled in-depth analysis 
of the impact of COVID-19 
on their markets.

Risk Movement
Reduced.

1,3

Competition 
and Clients:  
The Group 
operates 
in highly 
competitive 
yet fragmented 
markets.

Loss of market 
share due 
to changing 
markets and 
reduced financial 
performance 
arising from 
competitive 
threats.

26

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Strategic Report

Principal and Emerging Risks and Uncertainties

Business and Strategic risks (continued):

Link to 
G.O.P.

1,4

Risk Description

Economic and 
Global Political 
Changes: 
The Group’s 
businesses 
operate in three 
key geographic 
markets, namely 
Europe, North 
America and 
Asia Pacific.

Potential Impact

Key Mitigations and Controls

Assessment

Economic 
and political 
uncertainty could 
lead to a reduction 
or delay in client 
spending on the 
services offered 
by the Group and/ 
or a restriction on 
the Group’s ability 
to trade in certain 
jurisdictions. 

The Group provides high-quality data and 
analytics services, which are embedded in the 
day-to-day operations of our clients. In times 
of uncertainty, we aim to provide clarity and 
insight. 

When economic and political uncertainty lead 
to financial uncertainty, we have the following 
mitigations:
•  Management of headcount and overheads. 
•  Visibility of revenue through invoiced 
revenue and renewable contracts.

Overall
We are a global business 
operating in multiple 
sectors, which means 
our risk is spread across 
multiple economies and 
industries. There is not 
one specific economic or 
political risk factor that 
 is materially impacting  
the Group. 

•  We operate across multiple industry sectors 
and therefore are not reliant on one industry.

Brexit has not significantly 
impacted the Group. 

•  We operate in different geographies and 

therefore operate in a balanced portfolio of 
markets.

Acquisition and 
Disposal Risk

1,2,4

The failure to 
successfully 
identify and 
integrate key 
acquisitions could 
lead to loss of 
profits, inefficient 
business 
processes, 
inconsistent 
corporate culture 
and weakened 
brand.

M&A is a key pillar of Group strategy.
•  We engage with external advisers to help us 
identify and engage with strategic targets.
•  We have an internal team dedicated to M&A 
that meets regularly to discuss prospects, 
pipeline and progress of transactions.
•  All acquisitions are subject to rigorous due 
diligence (both internal and with the aid of 
external advisers) and operational review. 
A final business case is presented to the 
main Board as part of the supervision and 
approval process. 

•  Where necessary, external advisers with 
either technical and/or local knowledge  
are engaged.

•  For smaller acquisitions, a separate 

investment committee with delegated 
responsibility from the Board reviews the 
diligence process.

•  As a Board, an annual review of the Capital 
Allocation strategy is performed to ensure 
funding is available for M&A.

COVID-19 
COVID-19 has not had  
a significant impact on 
the financial performance 
compared to the previous 
year.

Risk Movement
Risk has reduced as we 
have grown to understand 
the impact of COVID-19/
Brexit and other factors 
causing uncertainty  
last year.

Overview
As we look to increase the 
level of M&A activity, the 
execution risk inherently 
increases. We believe we 
have put in place robust 
controls and processes 
to mitigate most of the 
execution risk.

COVID-19
COVID-19 slowed M&A 
activity in 2020, but had 
little impact in 2021 as we 
look to execute further 
transactions.

Risk Movement
Increase in risk due  
to increase in activity.

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

27

Strategic Report

Principal and Emerging Risks and Uncertainties

Operational risks:

Risk Description

Link to 
G.O.P.

Potential Impact

Mitigation

Financial

4

Personal Data

1,4

The Group’s reporting 
currency is Pounds 
Sterling. Given the 
Group’s significant 
international 
operations, 
fluctuations in 
currency exchange 
rates can affect the 
Group’s consolidated 
results.

As a global group, we 
are subject to many 
forms of direct and 
indirect taxation, and 
because of the many 
territories we are 
active within, tax law 
and compliance is a 
complex area.

The debt financing 
used to fund M&A is 
subject to interest 
rate risk, with the 
bank’s margin applied 
to SONIA (Sterling 
Overnight Interbank 
Average Rate). 
Movement in SONIA 
would cause variability 
in interest payments.

The loss/theft or 
misuse of personal 
data of employees, 
clients and others 
could cause 
significant harm to 
our key stakeholders 
and could lead 
to regulatory and 
reputational loss.

A significant mitigation is the natural hedge we 
have from our global operations. We generate 
around 60% of revenues from currencies other  
than Sterling, which is predominantly US Dollar, 
while around 40% of costs are derived from  
non-Sterling currencies, which are all primarily 
linked to movements of US Dollar. 
•  The net cash flow exposure is managed by 

entering into foreign exchange contracts that 
limit the risk from movements in US Dollar, Euro 
and Indian Rupee exchange rates with Sterling. 
Contracts are entered into in line with our 
Board-approved treasury policy (the policy is to 
hedge throughout the year at 20% per quarter 
for a period of 12 months out, so that in each 
quarter we enter with 80% of our net cash  
flow hedged).

•  We have an internal tax and treasury team with 
a remit to continually monitor and review tax 
and treasury matters of the Group. We engage 
a Big Four firm for tax advice and utilise their 
global network to both plan our tax exposure 
and manage compliance across the world. 
•  For related party transactions, a separate 

subcommittee of the Audit Committee has been 
established to monitor the controls that identify 
related party transactions and to authorise 
the type and nature of each transaction. The 
committee also regulates the arm’s length 
nature of each agreement.

We have an obligation to protect the data we hold, 
whether it is customer or employee data. Loss 
and/or misuse of this data could result in a loss of 
reputation, and regulatory sanctions or fines. 
•  Data Privacy steering committee, which is in 

place, provides continuous monitoring of data 
and privacy developments and adoption of best 
practice and advice across the Group. This Group 
includes commercial, legal and external advisers.

•  Regular health checks on sites to ensure 

compliance.

•  Focus on collecting first-party data, with project 
to monitor consents and consent management.
•  Legal department monitors laws and regulations 
that surround the use and management of data, 
in conjunction with external advisers.
IT, Cyber and Systems controls to prevent 
unauthorised access to our data (see right)

• 

How the business and 
strategic risks have 
changed

Overview
Our Group invoicing 
profile has not 
changed significantly 
and therefore our 
exposure and controls 
on currency have not 
changed.

As a Group we have 
worked on continuing 
to cease some of 
the shared services 
and related party 
relationships. Both 
the volume and value 
of transactions have 
reduced in 2021 and will 
continue to reduce in 
2022 and beyond.

COVID-19
Limited impact on 
the Group directly, 
with some sectoral 
downturns in some of 
the sectors we cover. 
However, these aren’t 
a significant part of the 
Group revenues.

Risk Movement
Stable.

Overview
Most of the data 
the Company holds 
is industry, market, 
and economic data. 
However, the processes 
and controls we have for 
the personal data of our 
clients, B2B audience 
and employees is 
continually being 
reviewed and improved.

COVID-19
No material impact.

Risk Movement
Stable.

28

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Strategic Report

Principal and Emerging Risks and Uncertainties

Operational risks (continued):

Risk Description

Link to 
G.O.P.

Potential Impact

Mitigation

IT, Cyber and 
Systems Failure

1,4

Significant operational 
or client disruption 
caused by a major 
IT disaster or cyber 
attack.

There is a risk of 
financial loss through 
successful phishing 
or whaling attacks or 
other cyber infiltration. 

Regulatory 
Compliance

4

The Group may be 
subject to regulations 
restricting its 
activities or affecting 
changes in taxation.

IT, Cyber and Systems failures continue to be a 
major area of focus for the Group. Key mitigations 
and controls for the Group:
•  Continuous and proactive monitoring of the 

cyber-threat landscape.
• 
Internal Information Security team.
•  Business continuity plans have been 

implemented across the Group, including 
disaster recovery programmes, and plans to 
minimise business disruption. 

•  Product and sales infrastructure hosted by 

• 

external third parties with adequate security 
protocols.
IT Infrastructure is managed by third-party 
providers with 24-hour management and 
monitoring with back-up and disaster protocols.

•  The Group regularly reviews its cyber security 
and website security protocols, and has 
undergone a review by an external third party.

•  External consultancy engaged to help with 
design and implementation of IT security, 
protections and outsourced CISO (Chief 
Information Security Officer) service.

•  Performance of automated vulnerability scans 

of externally exposed enterprise assets.
•  Maintenance and protection of back-up and 

recovery data.

•  Periodic external penetration tests on Group 

websites.

The majority of the Group’s operations are based 
in the United Kingdom, United States of America 
and India. Appropriate advisers are employed in all 
geographies to ensure the Group remains compliant 
with local laws and regulations. The Group has 
policies in place for anti-money laundering, anti-
bribery, whistleblowing and data protection and 
privacy that have been distributed to staff and are 
available on the Group’s intranet.

How the business and 
strategic risks have 
changed

Overview
We continue to have 
significant focus on 
ensuring that we 
implement and design 
best practice controls 
for our IT systems. 

We acknowledge that 
cyber threats including 
DDoS attacks, malware 
and hacking are an 
ever-increasing threat.

COVID-19
COVID-19 has caused 
a change in working 
practices with reliance 
on home-working and 
portable devices. 

During 2020, we 
quickly implemented 
controls to adapt to the 
new remote-working 
environment, which 
we have continued to 
review in 2021.

Risk Movement
Stable.

Overview
There has been no 
change to the risk 
level and the Group 
continues to operate its 
employee education for 
anti-money laundering, 
anti-bribery policy and 
data protection and 
privacy. 

COVID-19
No material impact.

Risk Movement
Stable.

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

29

Strategic Report

Directors’ Section 172(1) Statement

The  Board  acknowledges  its  responsibility  under  section  172(1)  of  the  Companies  Act  2006  and  below  sets  out  the  key  processes  and 
considerations that demonstrate how the Directors promote the success of the Company. The below statement sets out the requirements of 
the Act, section 172(1), and explains how the Directors discharge their duties.

As noted in the Corporate Governance Report (pages 39-45), the Board meets monthly with papers circulated in advance to allow the Directors 
to fully  understand the  performance  and  position  of the  Group,  alongside  matters  arising for  decision.  Each  decision that  is  made  by the 
Directors is supported by papers, which analyse the possible outcomes, so a decision can be made that best promotes the success of the 
Company and considers the impact on the wider stakeholder group. 

The Group has identified its stakeholder group and analysed each stakeholder based upon their level of interest in GlobalData and their level of 
power/influence on the Group. The Directors review this analysis, monitor the levels of engagement with each stakeholder and build feedback 
and stakeholder considerations into the governance and decision-making process.

Factors (a) to (f) below are all taken into account during the decision-making process. 

(a) The likely consequences of any decision in the long term
Supporting each decision, the Board is given access to management papers that set out impact analysis surrounding decision-making. The 
papers include diligence on the financial impact via forecasts, as well as non-financial factors and how the decision fits with the strategy of 
the Group. 

A primary example of this is the process by which acquisitions are considered by the Board. The Directors and Executive Management prepare 
a pack of information that considers: commercial diligence and analysis of strategic fit; financial and tax diligence on the target (including 
review of forecast and projections); and legal and compliance diligence. The team will set out the 100-day plan for integration and discuss risks 
with the Board. This insight will be collectively reviewed to ensure that the long-term impact of the acquisition is positive not only for the Group, 
but also for our clients (enhancing our capability and offering), our employees and shareholders.  

The Group has a 5-year plan, which is a financial plan supported by a Growth Optimisation Plan and has a number of KPIs linked to stakeholders. 
KPIs such as renewal rates give us insight into customer satisfaction and KPIs such as invoiced forward revenue, revenue and earnings growth 
are key for our shareholders, banks and our employees. This plan is reviewed regularly to benchmark our performance. Strategy is discussed 
at the monthly Board meetings and reviewed in detail each year, at the Board Away Day. This strategic thinking is intrinsic to future decision-
making. 

(b) The interests of the Company’s employees 
The Directors actively consider the interest of employees in major decisions. People is a regular agenda item at Board meetings where attrition 
rates, reasons for leaving and employee satisfaction are discussed. Our commitment to our people remains paramount because we recognise 
that the motivation, creativity and engagement of our people is critical to the Group’s success. We aim to be an employer of choice and one 
where our people feel respected, rewarded and engaged. Our success and future success depends on GlobalData being able to attract and 
retain the right talent.

The Group holds regular CEO Information Sessions to all colleagues around the globe. The content of these sessions, held by video conference, 
is aimed at keeping our workforce aligned with our vision, mission and strategy and delivers key strategic updates and initiatives as well as the 
overall aim to increase the level of employee engagement. 

The Company operates a “VOICES” Committee, which is an employee group working together to drive positive change for GlobalData and our 
employees. We encourage our employees to share their feedback and ideas on the issues that matter to them and their colleagues. This group 
is the platform to gather and discuss feedback, suggest ideas for improvement, and help to implement them. The results of the initiatives led by 
VOICES are published to colleagues on the internal intranet. During the year, four meetings were held, of which two were attended by Annette 
Barnes, our designated workforce Non-Executive Director. Throughout the year, the key themes of discussion were Diversity, Equality and 
Inclusion, Professional Development, Group Communications, Well-being, Philanthropy and work social events.

The designated workforce Non-Executive Director role has the aim of forging closer relationships between the Board and the workforce. This 
role includes being involved with the VOICES network and reviewing feedback from the whistleblowing hotline, providing a useful insight into 
employee matters. Due to this revision to the role of Remuneration Chair and its links to employees, the Board does not believe that workforce 
representation on the Board is required.

30

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Strategic Report

Directors’ Section 172(1) Statement

COVID-19 has brought significant challenges over the past two years, and we have adapted very well. The pandemic has changed the way 
people work, and at GlobalData we recognise the need to balance these changes with the needs of all our stakeholders. Therefore, we are 
currently reviewing our flexible working policy to establish a model that is best suited to our customers, the business, and employees for the 
longer term.

The Group benefits from the diversity and variety of its workforce and is fully committed to maintaining and encouraging diversity, including 
the composition of the Board. The Board is currently made up of 6 male and 2 female Directors.

The Executive Management Committee had 8 male employees and 2 female employees serve during the year and is a truly global committee, 
which represents the diverse nature of our Group. The Committee is made up of 6 members from the UK, 2 members from India, 1 from the US 
and 1 from Australia.  

At GlobalData we encourage our people to be actively involved in our strategy, product, and ongoing corporate development, which has been 
enhanced through the CEO briefings during 2021. This has enabled the Group to maintain a level of agility and the ability to plan, design and 
launch product enhancements in relatively short time frames.

(c) The need to foster the Company’s business relationships with suppliers, customers and others
The  Directors  have  identified the  Group’s  key  stakeholders  and  review,  at  least  annually, to  ensure there  is  sufficient  communication  and 
engagement. The review of the stakeholder map, which assesses the influence and interests of our stakeholders, is used to guide our decision-
making processes. The key initiatives and developments for each stakeholder group during the year are summarised below:

Our People
• 
• 

Shareholders
• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

Continuation of regular CEO Information Sessions to all our global colleagues
Four  VOICES  Committee  meetings,  of  which  two  were  attended  by  Annette  Barnes  in  her  role  as  the  designated  workforce  
Non-Executive Director.
Plans  to  expand  the  VOICES  initiative  into  a  wider  Employee  Resources  Group  in  2022,  which  came  from  feedback  from  the 
individual VOICES Committee meetings.
Group-wide events such as GlobalData Walks the World challenge, aimed at encouraging teams to take exercise breaks and raise 
monies for our charity partners.

Expanded our broker and analyst coverage in the previous year, in response to investor feedback of limited research and coverage 
of our results and prospects available.
Increased the number of investor meetings throughout the year, including a Capital Markets Day held on 27 January 2022, which 
gave investors the opportunity to review the Group strategy in detail, ask questions of management and see demonstrations of 
the product.
Outside of the results meetings, we have had several meetings with ESG departments of our institutional investors to talk through 
our ESG arrangements and plans.

Clients 
• 
• 

Customer Obsession is now the Group’s number-one priority in the Growth Optimisation Plan.
The  Group  is  firmly  focused  on  operating  as  a  customer-centric  organisation,  and  this  is  harboured  through  quality  account 
management,  customer  service  processes  and  review  of  customer  feedback  and  renewal  rates.  Page  13,  within  the  Chief 
Executive’s  Report,  discusses  how  the  Group  and  its  Board  address  the  Customer  Obsession  priority,  and  page  26  notes  the 
controls that we have in place to ensure we maintain strong relationships and partnerships with our clients. 

• 

•  We  have  initiated  a  collaborative  initiative  with  our  top-tier  clients  globally,  involving  relationship  managers,  sales  account 
managers, customer service, analysts and consultants to embed deeper relationships with our key customers. The initiative has 
involved more meetings with our clients as well as using technology to understand their needs in greater depth.
As an information services company, we want to be a catalyst for positive change for the markets and customers we serve. Both 
within and in front of the paywall, we are providing data-led insight into key areas of ESG. We recognise that ESG is strategically 
important  to  all  of  our  clients,  and  because  of  the  significant  amount  of  data  we  collect  and  analyse,  we  are  creating  a  vast 
ecosystem of ESG intelligence across our industries.
Our  standard  payment  terms  are  zero  days  ahead  of  the  contract  start  and  we  monitor  the  average  debtor  days,  which  
were 49 days in 2021 (2020: 46).

• 

•  We have a continued focus on product quality, innovation and giving our clients timely insights in an ever-evolving world.

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

31

Strategic Report

Directors’ Section 172(1) Statement 

• 

Banks
•  We maintain a strong relationship with each of our existing banks and we regularly meet/speak with each of the banks (NatWest 
Group, HSBC, Bank of Ireland and Silicon Valley Bank) and present financial information to them through quarterly management 
information packs.
The  Group  has  an  RCF facility  of  £240.5m, following the  exercise  of  its  incremental  RCF facility  of  £75m with  NatWest  Group, 
HSBC, Bank of Ireland and Silicon Valley Bank, plus an additional £20m facility entered into during 2021. The drawdown on the 
facilities is £200.7m as at 31 December 2021. 
The Group’s banking facilities are in place until April 2023, at which point the Group will be required to renew or extend its financing 
arrangements.  The  Directors  expect  this  to  be  possible  given  their  experience  of  accessing  finance  and  discussions  with  the 
Group’s current bankers, as well as discussions outside of its current banking group.

• 

Auditors
•  We appointed Deloitte LLP as auditors for 2020 following a decision to rotate audit firms in line with best practice. We went through 
an extensive first-year audit process to enable Deloitte to fully understand our business, its processes, people and controls and 
feedback from the first year audit has been fed into the audit planning for 2021 and beyond. 

•  Management  meets  regularly  with  the  audit  team  throughout  the  year  to  discuss  company  performance,  transactions  and 

strategy. The Chair, Audit Committee Chair and CEO also regularly meet with the audit partner and senior team.

Suppliers
•  While the majority of our cost base is people, we maintain strong working relationships with our suppliers and continually monitor 
supplier payment days. For key suppliers we perform diligence around their working practices and ethics as well as their financial 
stability and viability.

•  We  have  enhanced  the  technologies  we  use  in  our  operations  significantly  during  the  year,  and  as  such  have  forged  strong 
relationships with these providers. This has been particularly important as we try and embed and link our technologies together 
for operating efficiencies.

(d) The impact of the Company’s operations on the community and environment
The Group takes its responsibility within the community and wider environment seriously and acknowledge that more can be done. Our ESG 
Report on page 47 sets out the key themes that are considered by the Board. 

Our strategy is underpinned by ESG factors and ESG is integral to everything that we do. It is the foundation of our company and provides 
the platform for creating a successful and sustainable company for the long term. As a company, we understand that it is mutually beneficial 
to consider all of our stakeholders (our colleagues, our communities, our customers). We believe that information and technology are both 
powerful enablers of a successful transition towards a more sustainable society. 

For the year ended 31 December 2021, we have reported energy intensity metrics for our UK companies on pages 47-48. The Company has a 
relatively low carbon footprint because of the nature of its operations, but acknowledges improvements can always be made. 

We are working towards reporting against both GRI (Global Reporting Initiative) and SASB (Sustainability Accounting Standards Board) and 
have joined the Science Based Targets initiative, and GlobalData is committed to Business Ambition for 1.5°C and is part of the UN-backed 
campaign, Race to Zero. For more details see www.sciencebasedtargets.org/companies-taking-action.

GlobalData is a global company and has based itself in strategic locations for the long term. Within each community in which we operate, we 
try to engage with local issues and, in particular, look to make positive contributions to those communities. 

As a company, we have charity partners across the globe, with a particular focus on charities that help with mental well-being, education and 
empowering women in education. During the year we supported Mental Health Awareness Week, which included a GlobalData Walks the World 
challenge, which encouraged our global colleagues to take walks during periods of lockdown and culminated in a team challenge to walk the 
world.

We will continue to work with our charity partners and are now offering a volunteer programme to our colleagues to enable them to get more 
involved directly in our communities as well as our usual fundraising efforts. 

32

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Strategic Report

Directors’ Section 172(1) Statement

(e) The desirability of the company maintaining a reputation for high standards of business conduct
The Directors and the Company are committed to high standards of business conduct and governance. The Group has fully adopted the UK 
Corporate Governance Code despite there being options for more reduced codes for companies on AIM.  

GlobalData has improved its governance arrangements and reporting over the past two to three years. During the year:

• 

• 

• 

We have reviewed areas in the UK Corporate Governance Code in which we were not compliant and have taken actions against each. 
There is a table of actions and outcomes on page 39 to demonstrate this.
We have created a skilled and diverse Board of Directors, which has been enhanced this year with the appointments of Catherine Birkett 
and Julien Decot as well as the appointment of independent Chairman Murray Legg.
We are embedding an enhanced Enterprise Risk Management Framework across the Group, with an emphasis on internal controls around 
data privacy, data quality, cyber security and our other principal risks.

Where there is a need to seek advice on particular issues, the Board will seek advice from its lawyers and Nominated Adviser (“NOMAD”) to 
ensure the consideration of business conduct and its reputation is maintained.

(f) The need to act fairly between members of the Company
The Directors regularly meet with investors and give equal access to all investors and potential investors. Through its advisers, the Directors 
seek and obtain feedback from meeting with the investors and incorporate feedback into the Group’s decision-making processes.

The Group’s capital allocation policy is set out on page 8, which sets out the strategy on capital allocation including investment, dividend and 
share buy-back policies.

The Group operates share incentive plans for its employees. The Group uses free cash flow to buy back shares, via its Employee Benefit Trust, 
to limit the dilutive effect this has on existing shareholders. Each year the company proposes an ordinary resolution at its AGM to grant it 
authority to buy back up to 10% of its shareholding each year, but will make decisions on share buy-back in reference to its cash flow and 
distributable reserves position. As at 31 December 2021, there were 10.2 million share options outstanding and the Company had 4.8 million 
shares in treasury against these options. Following the year end, the Employee Benefit Trust made a further acquisition of 1.1 million shares, 
resulting in a combined holding at the date of signing of 5.9 million shares. 

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

33

Strategic Report

Going Concern and Viability

Going concern
The Group has closing cash of £22.6m as at 31 December 2021 and net debt of £177.6m (31 December 2020: net debt of £58.1m), being cash 
and cash equivalents less short- and long-term borrowings, excluding lease liabilities. The Group has outstanding loans of £200.7m which 
are syndicated with NatWest Group, HSBC, Bank of Ireland and Silicon Valley Bank. As at 31 December 2021, the Group had undrawn RCF of 
£31m and as at 28 February 2022 this stood at £18m. The Group’s banking facilities are in place until April 2023, at which point the Group will 
be required to renew or extend its financing arrangements as discussed in the long-term viability section below. The Group has generated 
£60.5m in cash from operations during 2021.

The Directors have a reasonable expectation that there are no material uncertainties that cast significant doubt about the Group’s ability 
to continue in operation and meet its liabilities as they fall due for the foreseeable future, being a period of at least 12 months from the 
date of approval of the financial statements. The Directors have modelled a number of worst-case scenarios to consider their potential 
impact on the Group’s results, cash flow and loan covenant forecast. Key assumptions built into the scenarios focus on cost savings and 
consulting revenue growth. In addition to performing scenario planning, the Directors have also conducted stress testing of the Business’s 
forecasts and, taking into account reasonable downside sensitivities (acknowledging that such risks and uncertainties exist), the Directors 
are satisfied that the business is expected to operate within its facilities. There remains headroom on the covenants under each scenario.

Through our normal business practices, we are in regular communication with our lenders and are satisfied they will be in a position to 
continue supporting us for the foreseeable future. 

The Directors therefore consider the strong balance sheet, with good cash reserves and working capital along with financing arrangements 
(which  are  due  to  be  renegotiated  prior  to  April  2023),  provide  ample  liquidity.  Accordingly,  the  Directors  have  prepared  the  financial 
statements on a going concern basis.

Long-Term Viability
The Directors have formally assessed the viability of the Group to December 2026 as part of the 5-year plan, taking account of the Group’s 
current position, its cash flows and the potential impact of the principal risks as outlined on pages 24-29 of this Annual Report. The Directors 
have a reasonable expectation that the Group will be able to continue in operation and meet its liabilities as they fall due over the period of 
their assessment. The Board considers this period as an appropriate review period as it offers a medium-term view and gives actions and 
strategy sufficient time to review against.

The 5-year plan has been built on the basis that the Group continues to achieve consistent revenue growth. The 2022 budget is the basis 
for the plan. Our cost base is relatively fixed and predictable and as such we have assumed modest cost growth. The cash flow assumptions 
follow our business model of our clients being invoiced in advance of the subscription start date and suppliers and employees are paid 
within 30 days and at the end of the month respectively.  

The 5-year plan has been subject to stress testing, the results of which show significant headroom in cash and facility terms. The Group also 
has strong headroom in relation to the financial covenants in place and no breach is forecast.

The  Group’s  prospects  are  assessed  primarily  through  the  annual  budgeting  process.  Detailed  plans  are  prepared  by  the  Executive 
Management Committee and are presented to the Board at the Annual Away Day, which allows a deep dive into various areas of the Business 
and provides the opportunity for input and scrutiny by the Board which ensures alignment with the overall Group strategy. Progress against 
plan is presented to the Board throughout the year, commenting on performance and any newly identified risks. The individual plans are 
then consolidated into an overall Group plan.

As noted on page 7 of the Annual Report, our business model has strong fundamental attributes, being significant recurring and visible 
revenue streams, strong incremental margins, robust working capital and operational cash flow and scalable opportunity.  

The  Board  feels  that  the  Group’s  four  strategic  priorities  give  the  appropriate  focus  to  protect  the  business  from  risks,  threats  and 
uncertainties as well as giving the agility to pursue opportunities as they arise and to capitalise on the business model attributes. The focus 
on being client centric, developing world-class products, sales excellence and operational agility are the correct focuses aligned with the 
Group’s Mission and Vision.

The Board believes internal execution to be the single greatest risk against its 5-year plan. The Group recognises the key mitigations to 
protect the Group from this as set out in its Principal Risks on page 26.

34

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Strategic Report

Going Concern and Viability

The Group has a term loan of £50.0m, an RCF facility of £115.5m, plus a further incremental RCF facility of £75.0m with NatWest Group, 
HSBC, Bank of Ireland and Silicon Valley Bank. The current drawdown on the facilities is £200.7m as at 31 December 2021. The Group’s 
banking facilities are in place until April 2023, at which point the Group will be required to renew or extend its financing arrangements. 
The Group has to date had a very supportive banking syndicate (as indicated by their willingness to convert the accordion facility to an 
incremental RCF facility in September 2021 and extension to the original RCF in December 2021). As such the Directors do not believe there 
will be any issues in renegotiating the loan facilities when necessary. On the basis that refinancing is possible on similar terms to the existing 
facilities, the Board has reviewed forecast cash flows until 2026 which demonstrate the ability to trade with headroom on its facilities and 
to meet ongoing repayments of the term loan.   

The  Board  is  satisfied  that  the  current  financial  position  of  the  Group,  its  significant  visibility  on  revenues  and  other  business  model 
fundamentals provide a stable platform for the Group to pursue its mission and vision for the Group. The Board is confident that in pursuing 
the four stated strategic priorities, this will protect business interests against threats and allow the Group to pursue opportunities that will 
drive growth.

Mike Danson
Chief Executive, approving the Strategic Report on behalf of the Board
28 February 2022

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

35

Directors’ Report

The Directors

The Directors who served the Group during the year and up to the date of signing were:

Murray Legg 
Non-Executive 
Chairman

Mike Danson 
Chief  
Executive

Graham Lilley 
Chief Financial 
Officer 

Annette Barnes 
Non-Executive 
Director 

Catherine Birkett 
Non-Executive 
Director 

Mike Danson founded 
Datamonitor Plc, an 
online information 
company, in 1990. In 
2000, Datamonitor 
completed its flotation 
on the London Stock 
Exchange and was 
sold to Informa Plc 
for £502m in 2007. 
GlobalData acquired the 
Datamonitor Financial, 
Datamonitor Consumer, 
MarketLine and Verdict 
businesses from 
Informa Plc in 2015.

Graham joined the  
Group in 2011 and 
progressed through to 
Group Finance Director 
before becoming Chief 
Financial Officer in 
January 2018. Graham 
started his career at 
PricewaterhouseCoopers, 
where he qualified as a 
Chartered Accountant 
and subsequently joined 
Datamonitor when it  
was part of Informa Plc.

Murray Legg is a 
Chartered Accountant 
with over 35 years of 
audit and advisory 
experience gained with 
PricewaterhouseCoopers 
in the UK, where he 
held a variety of senior 
management,  
governance and client 
roles. As a partner he 
spent 24 years auditing 
and advising major 
UK companies whose 
operations covered a 
broad range of industry 
sectors. Murray is 
currently also a Non-
Executive Director of 
Sutton and East Surrey 
Water Plc.

Chair of Audit 
Committee

Catherine is CFO for 
GoCardless, a global 
leader in recurring 
payments. Before 
joining GoCardless in 
2018, Catherine was 
CFO for one of Europe’s 
fastest-growing 
telecoms providers, 
Interoute, where she 
took the business from 
$20m to $800m in 
turnover over 16 years, 
leading equity and 
debt raises, including 
an inaugural high yield 
debt issue. While there, 
she also completed 10 
acquisitions, including 
one for a business half 
the size of Interoute, 
before overseeing a 
successful exit of the 
business in May 2018.

Senior 
Independent 
Director, Chair 
of Remuneration 
Committee

Annette joined the 
Board in February 
2017. In her Executive 
career, Annette was 
most recently Managing 
Director of Wealth & 
Mass Affluent for Lloyds 
Banking Group and CEO 
of Lloyds Bank Private 
Banking Limited. Prior 
to that, Annette was 
Managing Director 
of Bank of Scotland 
(Retail). Annette 
has over 30 years of 
Financial Services 
experience, working for 
Lloyds Banking Group, 
Bank of America, MBNA 
Europe Bank Limited 
and NWS Bank Limited. 
Annette is also a Non-
Executive Director of 
Leeds Building Society, 
Quilter Investment 
Platform Limited and 
Quilter Life & Pensions 
Limited. Annette’s 
prior experience has 
given her an excellent 
understanding 
of Technology, 
product channels 
to meet customer 
needs, Operational 
Management and Risk 
Management.

36

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Directors’ Report

The Directors

Peter Harkness 
Non-Executive 
Director 

Andrew Day 
Non-Executive 
Director 

Julien Decot 
Non-Executive 
Director

Bernard Cragg 
Former  
Chairman

Bernard Cragg was 
Chairman of GlobalData 
Plc until he retired from 
the Board at the AGM  
on 20 April 2021. 
Bernard qualified with 
PricewaterhouseCoopers 
as a Chartered 
Accountant before 
joining Carlton 
Communications, 
becoming Chief 
Financial Officer and 
Finance Director. 
Bernard was the 
Chairman of 
Datamonitor Plc and 
during his time there he 
was an integral part of 
the executive team that 
oversaw the rapid 
growth of the business 
and its eventual 
successful sale to 
Informa Plc in 2007.

Peter Harkness has 
more than 35 years’ 
experience as a Director 
or Chairman of several 
successful businesses, 
predominantly in the 
media sector. In addition 
to leading a number of 
private equity deals, 
Peter has also spent 
a total of 19 years 
as a Non-Executive 
Director of five quoted 
companies, including 
Walker Greenbank Plc 
and Chrysalis VCT Plc, 
and has twice been a 
Plc Chairman. Peter 
was a Non-Executive 
Director of Datamonitor 
until its sale to 
Informa Plc and was 
Chairman of the Butler 
Group until its sale to 
Datamonitor. Peter has 
also undertaken Board 
roles in the Third Sector.  
Peter’s experience and 
understanding of the 
media and information 
subscription sector is 
an excellent asset for 
the GlobalData Board, 
particularly how we sell 
and the selling process.

Andrew Day is currently 
employed as Group 
Chief Data Officer 
for Pepper Financial 
Services Group, where 
he is responsible for 
driving the adoption 
of data, analytics and 
machine learning 
across the group 
businesses to drive 
positive commercial and 
customer outcomes.  
Prior to joining Pepper, 
Andrew was Group 
Chief Data Officer 
at J Sainsbury Plc, 
Business Intelligence 
Director at News UK 
and General Manager of 
Business Intelligence 
at Telefónica. With over 
25 years’ experience 
in commercially 
orientated data and 
analytics, Andrew has 
a successful track 
record for implementing 
transformational data-
driven change across 
a number of industry 
sectors.

Julien is a veteran 
technology executive 
with more than 20 
years’ experience 
in Silicon Valley and 
Europe across multiple 
senior roles in major 
consumer internet 
companies including 
Amazon.com, eBay, 
Skype and Facebook. 
He joined Skype in 
2007, where he built 
the team in charge 
of Strategy, Business 
Development and 
Corporate Development, 
and managed the 
strategic partnership 
between Skype and 
Facebook. Prior to 
joining Facebook, 
he founded a mobile 
messaging company 
called TextMe, which 
reached 40m users and 
is now a profitable and 
successful business. 
He joined Facebook in 
2016 to lead Platform 
Partnerships for 
EMEA, and since 2018, 
has looked after its 
ecosytem of marketing 
partners to build 
innovative technologies 
and solutions for 
Facebook’s clients 
around the world. Julien 
holds a BA in Finance 
from ESCP Europe in 
Paris, as well as an MBA 
from UC Berkeley.

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

37

Corporate Governance Report

“The Group is a diverse, global 
Directors’ Report
business, but we aim to have 
a common tone across the 
organisation. We promote 
agility, innovation, hard 
work and ethical behaviours 
underpinned by our framework 
of ethical codes.”

38

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Directors’ Report

Corporate Governance Report

The Board has set out its responsibility for preparing the Annual Report and Accounts on page 62. The Board considers the Annual Report 
and the Accounts, taken as a whole, is fair, balanced and understandable and provides the information necessary for shareholders to assess 
the Company’s position and performance, business model and strategy.

The Board is committed to the highest standards of corporate governance and throughout the year has adopted all requirements of the 
UK Corporate Governance Code that are applicable to it as a ‘smaller company’ (defined in the UK Corporate Governance Code as being a 
company below the FTSE 350), with the exception of the provisions listed below. 

In  the  previous  year  and  throughout  2021  there  have  been  some  instances  of  non-compliance  with  the  Code.  These  are  listed  below, 
together with the remedial action taken and position as at 28 February 2022: 

Non-compliance with the Code

Remediation taken

During 2020, the Board acknowledged that due 
to Bernard Cragg’s time served as a Director, and 
his participation in the employee share option 
scheme, he was not independent under the 
Code. The Company was not in compliance with 
provisions 9 and 19 of the Code during the time 
Bernard served as Non-Executive Chairman. 

Bernard stood down in his role as Chairman at the AGM 
on 20 April 2021, and also resigned from the Board 
on the same date. Bernard was succeeded in his role 
as Non-Executive Chairman by Murray Legg, who is 
independent under the Code and from 20 April 2021 the 
Group has been compliant with provisions 9 and 19 of 
the Code. 

Up to March 2021 Peter Harkness was Chairman 
of the Remuneration Committee and a member 
of the Audit Committee. Due to Peter’s time 
served as a Director he was not an independent 
Non-Executive Director defined within provision 
10 of the Code and as such the Company was 
not in compliance with provision 19 of the Code 
for the period up to March 2021. 

In March 2021, Peter stepped down as Chair of the 
Remuneration Committee (and is no longer a member of 
the Committee) and is no longer a member of the Audit 
Committee. Peter has valuable sector and wider business 
skills. He also has knowledge of how the Group has evolved 
and therefore continues as a member of the Board of 
Directors. Due to the time Peter has served on the Board 
Peter is not an independent Non-Executive Director.   

During 2020 the Company did not engage with 
the workforce using a method prescribed by 
the Code, which meant that the Company was 
therefore not in compliance of provision 5 of the 
Code up until Annette Barnes was appointed the 
workforce designated Non-Executive Director 
in March 2021 and in this role engaged with the 
workforce. 

In March 2021 Annette Barnes was appointed as the 
workforce-designated Non-Executive Director. In 
this role Annette attended two VOICES Committee 
meetings and discussed themes such as Diversity, 
Equality and Inclusion, Professional Development, 
Group Communications, Well-being, Philanthropy and 
work social events. The VOICES Committee will develop 
into a series of formal Employee Resources Group in 
2022 with continued attendance and dialogue with the 
workforce and feedback to the full Board.

Until February 2022, the Company did not 
have a policy in respect of post-employment 
shareholding requirements and as a result did 
not comply with provision 36 of the Code. 

In February 2022 the company has implemented a Group 
Remuneration Policy, which sets out rules on shareholding 
and post-employment shareholding requirements. See 
Remuneration Report on pages 55-61.

In non-compliance with provisions 40 and 41 
of the UK Corporate Governance Code, the 
Remuneration Committee had not engaged 
with employees and shareholders when setting 
remuneration.

The remuneration of the Executive Directors has not 
been set following engagement with shareholders 
and employees. Our CEO has requested that he does 
not receive a salary and therefore the review of our 
Remuneration Committee only relates to the role of 
CFO. The Committee feels that its review of relevant 
benchmarks when setting remuneration is appropriate. 
However, should there be any material change to the 
remuneration arrangements of the Executive Directors it 
will seek to consult with key institutional shareholders. 

Compliant 
as at 28 
February 
2022

Compliant  
for the 
full year 
ended 31 
December 
2021





















ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

39

Directors’ Report

Corporate Governance Report

The  UK  Corporate  Governance  Code  is  publicly  available  at:  www.frc.org.uk/directors/corporate-governance-and-stewardship/uk-
corporate-governance-code.  

Details of GlobalData’s corporate governance practices are publicly available on its website at www.globaldata.com.

Responsibility for governance matters lie with the Board, which is accountable to shareholders and wider stakeholders for the activities of 
the Group.  

Board Leadership and Company Purpose
The Group is led by the Board. The Executive Directors meet regularly with investors to discuss the performance and governance of the 
Group and any feedback is communicated and distributed to the wider Board. The Chairs of the Remuneration and Audit Committees make 
themselves available to discuss with investors annually at the AGM.

The Board assesses the basis on which the Company generates and preserves value over the long term and have prepared a long-term 
viability statement on pages 34-35, which considers the 5-year plan. The Board considers the opportunities and threats to the business 
model and assessment is made on how the Group’s strategy is aligned to addressing the Group’s mission and protecting the sustainability 
of the business. The regular challenge and governance provided by the Board keeps the Executive Management Committee and the entire 
organisation united in achieving the Group goals.

The Board recognises that culture is an important aspect of its four strategic priorities which ultimately drives the Group towards its Mission. 
The Group is a diverse, global business but we aim to have a common tone across the organisation. We promote agility, innovation, hard 
work and ethical behaviours underpinned by our framework of ethical codes. We invest in our employees’ training and development with 
clear progression and career plans that allow our colleagues to flourish. We deliver consistent training, communication and policy across 
the Group and within different work groups. We recognise that it is advantageous to promote different cultures within different functions 
of the organisation which all contribute to the overall culture of the business. For example in recent years we have implemented a reward 
structure within our sales teams which is consistent across the globe and is aimed at getting the best out of sales teams, but the reward 
structures elsewhere in the business differ dependent on performance metrics. 

During  2021,  the  Company  operated  a  VOICES  Committee,  which  is  an  employee  group  working  together  to  drive  positive  change  for 
GlobalData.  Following  feedback  and  consultation with the VOICES  Committee,  during  2022 we  aim to transition to  a  series  of targeted 
Employee Resources Groups, which will take on the role of VOICES and expand its coverage. We encourage our employees to share their 
feedback and ideas on the issues that matter to them and their colleagues. These groups will be the platform to gather and discuss feedback, 
suggest ideas for improvement, and help to implement them. The results of the initiatives led by VOICES are published to colleagues on the 
internal intranet. During the year, four meetings were held, of which two were attended by Annette Barnes, our designated workforce Non-
Executive Director. Throughout the year, the key themes of discussion were Diversity, Equality and Inclusion, Professional Development, 
Group Communications, Well-being, Philanthropy and work social events. The role of designated Non-Executive Director for employees has 
the aim of forging closer relationships between the Board and the workforce. This role includes being involved with the VOICES Committee 
and reviewing any feedback from the whistleblowing hotline, providing a useful insight into employee matters. Due to this revision to the 
role of Remuneration Chair and its links to employees, the Board does not believe that workforce representation on the Board is required.

Our colleagues can also raise concerns in confidence and anonymously via our whistleblowing hotline, which is facilitated via an independent 
company, with any whistleblowing reports notified to our Group HR Director and the Senior Independent Non-Executive Director.

The Group operates an intranet, which every employee has access to. The intranet publishes Company policies and procedures, and it is also 
used to communicate Company events, activities and regular corporate updates from the CEO. 

The  Directors  have  set  out  its wider  stakeholder  analysis  in the  Directors’  section  172(1)  statement. The  Board views  renewal  rates  and 
payment statistics for a high-level view on the health of client and supplier engagement, but also has deep dives into engagement through 
discussion with commercial managers.

Division of Responsibilities
The Board is made up of two Executive Directors and six Non-Executive Directors. The Executive Directors who have served during the year 
are Mike Danson and Graham Lilley.

The Chairman is responsible for the running of the Board and, together with the Board members, approving the strategy of the Group. The 
Chief Executive is responsible for developing the Group’s strategy and operational management of the business. 

40

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

                
Directors’ Report

Corporate Governance Report

Our  Non-Executive  team  comprises  the  Chair,  Murray  Legg;  the  Senior  Independent  Director,  Annette  Barnes;  Andrew  Day;  Catherine 
Birkett; Julien Decot and Peter Harkness. 

All the Non-Executive Directors are considered independent, with the exception of Peter Harkness, who is not considered to be independent 
under the definition of the Code. However, the Board believes Peter is independent of mind and brings valuable experience to the Company. 
With effect from 20 April 2021, Peter Harkness was no longer a member of the Audit and Remuneration Committees. 

The Non-Executive Directors’ shareholdings are detailed in the Directors’ Interests table on page 45 of the report. The Board has determined 
that the Non-Executive Directors are independent and that their shareholding in the Company does not affect their independence. 

In  2021, the  Board  met  11 times  during the year  and there  is  a formal  schedule  of  matters  reserved for the  consideration  of the  Board. 
The Board is responsible to the shareholders for the proper management of the Group. The Board sets and monitors the Group strategy, 
reviewing trading performance, ensuring adequate funding, examining development possibilities and formulating policy on key issues. The 
Board is also responsible for monitoring the current and emerging risk and control environment, and has set out its approach to risk on 
pages 24-29. The Board confirms that it has completed a robust assessment of the Group’s emerging and principal risks during the year. The 
Non-Executive Directors have the opportunity to meet without the Executive Directors in order to discuss the performance of the Board, 
its committees and individual Directors. 

All members of the Board have access to the Company Secretary who is responsible for advising the Board on all governance matters. 
Procedures are in place for the Directors in the furtherance of their duties to take independent professional advice, if necessary, at the 
Company’s  expense.  The  Company  Secretary  ensures  that  the  Board  and  its  committees  are  supplied  with  papers  to  enable  them  to 
consider matters in good time for meetings and to enable them to discharge their duties. Responsibility for the appointment and removal of 
the Company Secretary is held by the Board as a whole. 

The Board has procedures that require Directors to notify the Chairman and Company Secretary of all new external interests and any actual 
or perceived conflicts of interest that may affect their role as a Director of the Company. As part of this process, the Board considers each 
conflict situation separately according to the particular situation and in conjunction with the Company’s Articles.

Composition, Succession and Evaluation
The Nominations Committee was established to lead the process for appointments and manage succession plans for its executives. The 
committee is comprised of one Executive Director and three Non-Executive Directors, including the Chairman. The Board is committed to 
ensuring that the Nominations Committee always consists of a majority of Independent Non-Executive Directors, but where there is an 
equal number of Independent and Non-Independent members the casting vote is made by the Independent Chair. The casting vote going to 
Murray Legg, the Non-Executive Chair of the Nominations Committee. Where the Nominations Committee uses an external search agency 
to appoint a member of the Board, it is disclosed in the Annual Report. Two new appointments were made during the year (Catherine Birkett 
and Julien Decot) in which an independent external search agency (Tyzack Partners) was engaged to assist with both appointments. The 
Group  and  individual  Directors  have  no  other  connection with Tyzack  Partners  outside  of this  appointment  process. When  making  new 
appointments the Board takes into consideration other demands on Directors’ time, and external appointments by any members of the 
Board require prior approval to confirm no conflicts of interest or significant demands on time. 

The Group benefits from the diversity and variety of its workforce and is fully committed to maintaining and encouraging diversity, including 
the composition of the Board. The Board is currently made up of 6 male Directors and 2 female Directors and the Executive Management 
Committee had 8 male employees and 2 female employees serve during the year. 

All Directors are required to stand for re-election every year. The terms and conditions of the appointment of the Non-Executive Directors 
are available for inspection at our registered office. Prior to recommending reappointments at the AGM, the Board considers whether each 
Non-Executive  Director  continues  to  be  independent  and  to  appropriately  challenge  management,  as well  as  each  other,  in  Board  and 
Committee meetings. Following review, the Board has reaffirmed that each Non-Executive Director is able to offer an external perspective 
on  the  business,  is  able  to  constructively  challenge  and  scrutinise  activities,  is  independent  in  character  and  judgement,  and  has  the 
required experience necessary to perform their role as an independent Director.

The Board conducts an annual evaluation process, which involves the performance appraisal of both the Executive and Non-Executive 
members of the Board. The review is undertaken by all Directors via an online survey on the overall performance of the Board during the 
year, which is fed back and debated, and then drives the actions and objectives of the Board.

Individual Directors are appraised by virtue of their role within the Board, whereby the Chairman appraises the Chief Executive and the 
Non-Executive Directors, the Chief Executive appraises the Chief Financial Officer and the entire Board appraises the Chairman which is 
delivered by the Senior Independent Non-Executive Director.

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

41

Directors’ Report

Corporate Governance Report

The Nominations Committee regularly reviews succession plans for the Board and Senior Management, with plans prepared on an immediate, 
medium- and long-term basis.

As a ‘smaller company’ (defined in the UK Corporate Governance Code as being a company below the FTSE 350) the Board has decided 
that the internal evaluation of Board performance conducted in the year is sufficient and that external facilitation of the evaluation is not 
necessary in this financial period.

Audit, Risk and Internal Control
The Board has established Audit, Nomination and Remuneration Committees with mandates to deal with specific aspects of its business. 
The table below details the membership and attendance of individual Directors at Board and committee meetings held during the year 
ended 31 December 2021.

Board meetings during the year:

Number of meetings

Murray Legg

Mike Danson 

Graham Lilley  

Annette Barnes

Peter Harkness 

Andrew Day

Catherine Birkett

Julien Decot

Board

Audit  
Committee

Remuneration  
Committee

Nominations  
Committee

11

11

11

11

10

11

9

7

4

-

-

4

1*

4

3

-

3

-

-

3

1*

3

-

1

2

2

-

2

2

-

-

-

*Peter’s attendance at these meetings was prior to the AGM, which was held on 20 April 2021.

The Audit  Committee  is  comprised  of the  Chair  Catherine  Birkett,  Murray  Legg, Annette  Barnes  and Andrew  Day.  Catherine  Birkett  is  a 
Chartered Accountant with recent and relevant financial experience. 

The Audit Committee met four times in the year with the external auditors in attendance. 

The Audit Committee is responsible for:

•  Monitoring the integrity of the financial statements and any formal announcements relating to the company’s financial performance, 

• 

• 
• 
• 

• 
• 

• 

and reviewing significant financial reporting judgements contained in them.
Providing advice on whether the Annual Report and Accounts, taken as a whole, is fair, balanced and understandable, and provides the 
information necessary for shareholders to assess the Company’s position and performance, business model and strategy.
Reviewing the Company’s internal financial controls and internal control and risk management systems.
Considering annually whether there is a need for an internal audit function and reporting its view and findings to the Board.
Conducting the tender process and making recommendations to the Board about the appointment, reappointment and removal of the 
external auditor, and approving the remuneration and terms of engagement of the external auditor.
Reviewing and monitoring the external auditor’s independence and objectivity.
Reviewing  the  effectiveness  of  the  external  audit  process,  taking  into  consideration  relevant  UK  professional  and  regulatory 
requirements.
Developing and implementing policy on the engagement of the external auditor to supply non-audit services, ensuring there is prior 
approval of non-audit services, considering the impact this may have on independence, taking into account the relevant regulations 
and ethical guidance in this regard, and reporting to the Board on any improvement or action required.

The Audit Committee discharges its responsibilities through receiving reports from management and advisers, working closely with the 
auditors, carrying out and reviewing risk assessments and taking counsel where appropriate in areas when required to make a judgement.

The  Board  has  overall  responsibility  for  the  Group’s  system  of  internal  controls  and  for  monitoring  its  effectiveness.  Such  a  system  is 
designed to manage rather than eliminate risk of failure to achieve business objectives and can only provide reasonable and not absolute 
assurance  against  material  misstatement  or  loss.  The  internal  controls  are  considered  within  the  Principal  and  Emerging  Risks  and 
Uncertainties section of the Strategic Report on pages 24-29.

42

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

 
Directors’ Report

Corporate Governance Report

The Directors review the effectiveness of the Group’s system of internal controls. This review extends to all controls including financial, 
operational, compliance and risk management. Formal risk review is a regular Board agenda item.

The key controls reviewed by the Board during the year comprise the following:

• 

The  preparation  of  comprehensive  annual  budgets  and  business  plans  integrating  both  financial  and  operational  performance 
objectives, with an assessment of the associated business and financial risks. The overall Group budget and business plan is subject 
to approval by the Board.

•  Weekly sales reports are produced and reviewed by management.
•  Monthly management accounts are prepared and reviewed by the Board. This includes reporting against KPIs and exception reporting.
• 
An organisational structure with formally defined lines of responsibility. Authorisation limits have been set throughout the Group. 
• 
The monthly preparation and review of balance sheet control account reconciliations.
• 
Regular review of IT and cyber security controls and enhancements.

The Board, in conjunction with the Audit Committee, reviewed the 2021 Annual Report and Financial Statements to ensure that they provide 
a fair, balanced and understandable reflection of the Group, its performance, position and future prospects.

Remuneration 
The  Remuneration  Committee  comprises  the  Chair  Annette  Barnes,  Murray  Legg,  Andrew  Day  and  Julien  Decot.  The  Remuneration 
Committee is responsible for determining the service contract terms, remuneration and other benefits of the Executive Directors, details 
of which are set out in the Remuneration Report on pages 55-61. The terms of reference of the Remuneration Committee are available for 
inspection on request.

As part of Annette’s role as Remuneration Committee Chair, she has undertaken the role of designated Non-Executive for the workforce. 
This role involves a close working relationship with the Group HR Director and the VOICES network. Engagement with the workforce spans a 
range of items including culture, remuneration and well-being. The Board see this as an important duty to drive positive actions.

To date, in non-compliance with provisions 40 and 41 of the UK Corporate Governance Code, the remuneration of the Executive Directors has 
not been set following engagement with shareholders and employees. The remuneration of the Executive Directors has been set as outlined 
in the Remuneration Policy which addresses the requirements of Provision 40 with the exception disclosed above. Our CEO has requested 
that he does not receive a salary and therefore the remit of our Remuneration Committee as it relates to Executive Directors only addresses 
the role of CFO. The Committee feels that its review of relevant benchmarks when setting Executive remuneration is appropriate. Should 
there be any material change to the remuneration arrangements of the Executive Directors in the future, the Remuneration Committee will 
seek to consult with key stakeholders.

Related Party Transactions
The Related Party Transactions (RPT) Committee comprises the Chairman Murray Legg, Peter Harkness, Annette Barnes and Andrew Day. 
The Committee met twice during 2021. The Committee ensures that there are adequate controls in place to provide assurance that any 
transaction which is or may be a related party transaction in nature is conducted on terms that are at arms’ length and reasonable. 

Going Concern
The Group meets its day-to-day working capital requirements through free cash flow. Based on cash flow projections, the Group considers 
the existing financing facilities to be adequate to meet short-term commitments. 

The Directors have a reasonable expectation that there are no material uncertainties that cast significant doubt about the Group’s ability to 
continue in operation and meet its liabilities as they fall due for the foreseeable future, being a period of at least 12 months from the date 
of approval of the financial statements. Accordingly, the Group has prepared the Annual Report and Accounts on a going concern basis.

Long Term Viability
The Directors have set out a long-term viability statement on pages 34-35 of the Strategic Report.

Shareholder Relationships
The Company operates a corporate website at www.globaldata.com where information is available to potential investors and shareholders. 

The Board uses the AGM to communicate with shareholders and seek their participation, as well as one-to-one results presentations with 
its investors at each full year and interim results announcement. The Group also held a Capital Markets Day for its institutional investors, 
brokers and research analysts on 27 January 2022 to give an update on strategy. The Notice of the Annual General Meeting will be circulated 
more than 21 clear days prior to the meeting. 

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

43

Directors’ Report

Corporate Governance Report

The  Directors’  interests  are  disclosed  on  page  45,  which  includes  the  shareholding  of  Mike  Danson  who  owns  74,674,349  shares  as  at 
28 February 2022, representing 63.1% of the total share capital. There are no other individual shareholders owning more than 10% of the 
company’s issued share capital. 

There are no specific restrictions on the size of a holding nor on the transfer of shares, which are both governed by the general provisions 
of the Articles of Association and prevailing legislation. The Directors are not aware of any agreements between holders of the Company’s 
shares that may result in restrictions on the transfer of securities or on voting rights. 

No person has any special rights of control over the Company’s share capital and all its issued shares are fully paid. 

With regard to the appointment and replacement of Directors, the Company is governed by its Articles of Association, the Companies Act 
and related legislation. The Articles themselves may be amended by special resolution of the shareholders. The powers of Directors are 
described in the Board Terms of Reference, copies of which are available on request. 

The Company has the authority to purchase its own shares. The authority limits the maximum number of shares that can be purchased to 
approximately 10% of the Company’s current issued share capital. The authority is proposed each year as a resolution at the Company’s 
AGM for shareholders to vote on.

Employee Policies
The Group places considerable value on the involvement of its employees and keeps them informed on matters affecting them as employees 
and  on  the  factors  affecting  the  performance  of  the  Group.  This  is  achieved  through  formal  and  informal  meetings.  As  part  of  Group 
communications we hold regular CEO Information Sessions, which are video conference meetings attended by all Group employees. These 
meetings are used as a forum to keep our colleagues up to date with performance, strategy and other corporate communication. Annette’s 
role as workforce designated Non-Executive Director also helps to increase engagement between the Board and the wider workforce.

The Group benefits from the diversity and variety of its workforce and is fully committed to maintaining and encouraging diversity. It is 
the  Group’s  policy to  give full  and fair  consideration to the  employment  of  disabled  persons, the  continuing  employment  of  employees 
becoming disabled, and to the full development of the careers of disabled employees, having regard to their particular abilities.

The Group does not discriminate on the grounds of gender, race, disability, sexuality, religion, philosophical belief, political belief, trade union 
membership or age as guided by the Equality Act 2010. 

At 31 December 2021, the Group employed the following number of employees of each gender:

Male

Female

2021

No.

2,066

1,558

3,624

2020

No.

2,014

1,458

3,472

Health and Safety
It is the policy of the Group to conduct all business activities in a responsible manner, free from recognised hazards and to respect the 
environment, health and safety of our employees, customers, suppliers, partners, neighbours and the community at large. 

Political Donations
The Group has not made any political donations during the year.

Supplier Payments Policy
It is the Group’s policy to abide by the payment terms agreed with suppliers whenever it is satisfied that the supplier has provided the goods 
and services in accordance with agreed terms and conditions. During 2021, average creditor days were 46 days (2020: 46 days).

Subsequent Events 
These are no subsequent events.

Dividends
These are disclosed within the Strategic Report on page 11.

44

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

 
Directors’ Report

Corporate Governance Report

Financial Instruments
Use of financial instruments and exposure to various financial risks has been discussed within the Strategic Report (page 22).

Future Developments
Future developments have been discussed within the Chief Executive’s Report on page 16.

Directors’ Interests
Details  of  the  Company’s  share  capital  are  set  out  in  note  23  to the  financial  statements. As  at  28  February  2022,  Mike  Danson  had  a 
beneficial interest of 63.1 per cent of the issued ordinary share capital of the Company. No other person has notified any interest in the 
ordinary shares of the Company, in accordance with AIM Rule 17.

The interests of the Directors as at 28 February 2022 in the ordinary shares of the Company were as follows:

Mike Danson 

Peter Harkness 

Murray Legg

Number of ordinary shares

74,674,349

55,000

23,000

As  at  31  December  2021,  Graham  Lilley  had  400,000  share  options  in  issue  (2020:  400,000), which  included  100,000  share  options  in 
Scheme 1 and 300,000 in Scheme 2.

Directors’ Indemnities
To  the  extent  permitted  by  English  law  and  the  Articles,  the  Directors  are  granted  an  indemnity  from  the  Group  in  respect  of  liability  
arising from, or in connection with, the execution of their powers, duties and responsibilities as a Director of the Company and any of its 
subsidiaries. The indemnity would not provide coverage where the Director is proved to have acted fraudulently or dishonestly. The Group 
purchases and maintains Directors’ and Officers’ insurance cover against certain legal liabilities and the costs of claims in connection with 
any act or omission by its Directors and Officers in the execution of their duties.

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

45

Environmental, Social and Governance

We continue to recognise 
Directors’ Report
that how we engage 
with our people, clients, 
business partners, the wider 
community and environment 
is fundamental to the 
Group’s success. The Group 
is committed to focusing on 
creating and maintaining 
positive long-term 
relationships with our broad 
base of stakeholders.

46

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Directors’ Report

Environmental, Social and Governance

Environmental, Social and Governance (“ESG”) matters are a key part of our strategy, and for us at GlobalData it is about safeguarding long-
term viability and sustainable growth for the Company, our people, our clients and our shareholders. Furthermore, we understand ESG is an 
emerging theme for our clients so we are offering more and more insights and data to help them understand the ESG metrics so they can 
make long-term strategic decisions, with the impact on the environment, their communities and stakeholders as a main focus. 

We  continue  to  recognise  that  how  we  engage  with  our  people,  clients,  business  partners,  the  wider  community  and  environment  is 
fundamental to the Group’s success. The Group is committed to focusing on creating and maintaining positive long-term relationships with 
our broad base of stakeholders.

Environment
As  a  data  and  analytics  company,  our  products  are  created  and  distributed  digitally.  This  means  our  carbon  footprint  is  considerably 
smaller than for many other companies of our size. Despite the structural benefits that we have as a digital company, we are committed to 
minimising the impact of our operations on the environment.

The  Group  is  pleased  to  report  its  current  UK-based  annual  energy  usage  and  associated  annual  greenhouse  gas  (“GHG”)  emissions 
pursuant to the Companies (Directors’ Report) and Limited Liability Partnerships (Energy and Carbon Report) Regulations 2018 (“the 2018 
Regulations”) that came into force 1 April 2019. 

In accordance with the 2018 Regulations, the energy use and associated GHG emissions are for those assets owned or controlled within the 
UK only that come under the operational control boundary. Therefore, energy use and emissions are aligned with financial reporting for the 
UK subsidiaries and exclude the non-UK based subsidiaries that would not qualify under the 2018 Regulations in their own right. 

The 2019 UK Government Environmental Reporting Guidelines and the GHG Protocol Corporate Accounting and Reporting Standard (revised 
edition) were followed. The 2021 UK Government GHG Conversion Factors for Company Reporting were used in emissions calculations. The 
report has been reviewed independently by Briar (Briar Consulting Engineers Limited).

The electricity and natural gas energy use was compiled predominantly from invoices, with some pro-rating to account for missing months 
by  apportioning  available  data to  match the  reporting  period.   Where  energy  has  been  recharged  by  landlords  on  a fiscal  basis,  energy 
consumption has been estimated using an average unit cost. CIBSE (Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers) benchmark data 
has been used in relation to serviced office space where energy is included within the rental fee.

Expense claims were used to calculate energy and emissions from grey fleet and one company car. SECR requires that large unquoted 
companies disclose their emissions related to fuel used in personal/hire cars on business use (including fuel for which the organisation 
reimburses its employees following claims for business mileage). Under the GHG Protocol Corporate Accounting and Reporting Standard 
these emissions fall under scope 3 (category 6) and have been grouped under the heading of “Business Travel”.

The emissions are divided into mandatory and voluntary emissions according to the 2018 Regulations, then further divided into the direct 
combustion of fuels and the operation of facilities (scope 1), indirect emissions from purchased electricity (scope 2) and further indirect 
emissions that occur as a consequence of company activities but occur from sources not owned or controlled by the organisation (scope 3).

Breakdown of Energy Consumption Used to Calculate Emissions (kWh)

Purchased electricity

Natural gas

Heat

Transport fuel

2021

kWh

1,026,836

496,830

50,160

3,403

2020

kWh

1,033,265

462,549

50,160

9,798

Total gross energy consumed

1,577,229

1,555,772

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

47

 
Directors’ Report

Environmental, Social and Governance

Breakdown of Emissions Associated with the Reported Energy Use (tCO₂e)

Scope 1

Natural gas

Transport – company-owned vehicles

Scope 2

Purchased electricity (location based)

Heat

Scope 3

Transport – Business travel in employee-owned vehicles

Total gross emissions

2021

tCO₂e

91.0

0.1

218.0

9.0

0.7

318.8

2020

tCO₂e

85.0

-

241.0

9.0

2.0

337.0

Intensity Ratios
Our chosen carbon intensity ratio is gross tonnes of carbon dioxide equivalent emissions per million pounds (£m) of revenue.

Tonnes of CO₂e per £m

Year Ended 
31 December 2021

Year Ended 
31 December 2020

2.44

2.71

Our  activities  are  split  between  energy  used  in  buildings  and  for  business  travel.  As  a  consequence,  we  have  also  chosen  to  report  
gross tonnes of carbon dioxide equivalent emissions per 1,000 metres squared of office space for emissions related to buildings, and gross 
tonnes of carbon dioxide equivalent emissions per 1,000 miles travelled for emissions related to business travel.

Buildings

Tonnes of CO₂e per 000 m2 Gross Internal Area (GIA)

Business Travel

Tonnes of CO₂e per 1,000 miles

Year Ended 
31 December 2021

Year Ended 
31 December 2020

45.5

48.3

Year Ended 
31 December 2021

Year Ended 
31 December 2020

0.270

0.276

Energy efficiency action during current financial year
The management of resources and the need to embed sustainability is an important issue for the Group.  We are working towards reporting 
against both GRI (Global Sustainability reporting standards) and SASB (Sustainability Accounting Standards Board) and have joined the 
Science Based Targets initiative and GlobalData is committed to Business Ambition for 1.5°C and is part of the UN-backed campaign, Race 
to Zero. For more details see www.sciencebasedtargets.org/companies-taking-action.

This is only the second year that we have reported against our UK Only energy consumption and 2020 and 2021 are difficult benchmarks to 
fully understand our base line (given the impact of the pandemic). The emissions savings resulting from reduced travel and the increased 
number of video conferences has not been quantified, but this practice has resulted in behaviour changes that are expected to continue 
for the foreseeable future.

Given  our  commitment  to  the  Business  Ambition  for  1.5°C  initiative,  we  are  working  on  a  fully  costed  and  actionable  plan  to  fulfil  our 
commitment on climate change. Going forward we will publish details of this plan and report against our progress towards it.

The Directors believe that environmental risk factors are emerging for the Group but are not a principal risk to the Group.

48

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

 
Directors’ Report

Environmental, Social and Governance

Social
The Group benefits from the diversity and variety of its workforce and is fully committed to maintaining and encouraging diversity. It is the 
Group’s policy to give full and fair consideration to the employment of disabled persons, the continuing employment of employees becoming 
disabled, and to the full development of the careers of disabled employees, having regard to their particular abilities.

The Group does not discriminate on the grounds of gender, race, disability, sexuality, religion, philosophical belief, political belief, trade union 
membership or age as guided by the Equality Act 2010. 

We have made progress during 2021 on greater gender balance throughout our organisation

% Female

Board

Executive Management Committee

Group Colleagues

As at 31  
December 2021

As at 31  
December 2020

25%

20%

43%

14%

20%

42%

Change

+11 p.p.

+/ -

+1 p.p.

As a company, we have charity partners across the globe, with a particular focus on charities that help with mental well-being, education 
and empowering women in education. During the year we supported Mental Health Awareness Week, which included a GlobalData Walks 
the World challenge, which encouraged our global colleagues to take walks during periods of lockdown and culminated in a team challenge 
to walk the world.

We will continue to work with our charity partners and are now offering a volunteer programme to our colleagues to enable them to get more 
involved directly in our communities as well as our usual fundraising efforts. 

We are also launching some professional development initiatives including mentoring programmes and funded learning and development.

Governance
The Board is committed to achieving the highest standards of corporate governance. The Group is working towards full adoption of the 
UK Corporate Governance Code despite there being options for more reduced codes for companies on AIM.  Responsibility for governance 
matters lies with the Board, which is accountable to shareholders and wider stakeholders for the activities of the Group. We are also working 
towards reporting our ESG activities/performance against SASB and GRI standards. 

GlobalData has improved its governance arrangements and reporting over the past two to three years. During the year we have:

•  Reviewed areas in the UK Corporate Governance Code in which we were not compliant and have taken actions against each. There is a 

table of actions and outcomes on page 39 to demonstrate this.

•  We have created a skilled and diverse Board of Directors, which has been enhanced this year with the appointments of Catherine Birkett 

and Julien Decot as well as the appointment of independent Chairman Murray Legg.

•  We  are  embedding  an  enhanced  Enterprise  Risk  Management  Framework  across  the  Group,  with  an  emphasis  on  internal  controls 

around data privacy, data quality, cyber security and our other principal risks.

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

49

Audit Committee Report

“We are well positioned 
Directors’ Report
as a business to make 
further progress in 2022. 
Underpinned by our strong 
invoiced forward revenue 
position of £107.7m at the 
start of the new financial year 
and largely fixed cost base 
driving margin expansion, 
we look forward to strong 
organic revenue growth 
and continued margin 
improvement in 2022.”

Mike Danson, Chief Executive Officer

50

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Directors’ Report

Audit Committee Report

I am pleased to present to you my first Audit Committee report, at GlobalData. 

Key Activities of the Audit Committee
The Audit Committee assists the Board in setting Governance standards and has specific responsibility over financial controls, financial 
reporting and audit effectiveness. In 2021, specifically, the Audit Committee has:

•  Conducted  a  review  of  the  Annual  Report  and  Accounts  and  Interim  Statements  to  confirm  that  they  were  fair,  balanced  and 

understandable;

•  Reviewed the significant financial judgements made in the year; and 
•  Reviewed  the  effectiveness  of  the  Group’s  internal  controls  and  risk  management  framework  for  both  financial  and  non-financial 

controls.

During the year the Audit Committee met on four occasions, and I am satisfied that we were presented with papers of good quality and in 
a timely fashion.

As at 31 December 2021, the Committee comprises only independent Non-Executive Directors and consists of myself, Catherine Birkett as 
Chair, Annette Barnes, Murray Legg, and Andrew Day.

The Integrity of Financial Reporting
We reviewed the integrity of the financial statements and all formal announcements relating to financial performance during 2021. As part 
of the  review, we  challenged  management  on whether  significant  areas  of  judgement  and  significant  risks were  adequately  evaluated, 
reported and disclosed. 

Fair, Balanced and Understandable
On  behalf  of  the  Board,  the  Committee  reviewed  the  2021  Annual  Report  and  Financial  Statements  to  ensure  that  they  provide  a  fair, 
balanced and understandable reflection of the Group, its performance, position and future prospects.

As part of the review, the Committee considered whether: 
•  There are any material or sensitive omissions from the narrative;
•  The narrative is a true and balanced reflection of events and performance in the year;
•  There is consistency throughout the Annual Report and Financial Statements; and
•  There is a clear explanation of key performance indicators, their link to performance and strategy and equal prominence of statutory 

performance measures.

In  the  view  of  the  Committee,  the  Annual  Report  is  fair,  balanced  and  understandable  in  accordance  with  the  requirements  of  the  UK 
Corporate Governance Code.

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

51

Directors’ Report

Audit Committee Report

Significant Financial Estimates and Judgements

Issue

Consideration of estimation or judgement

Valuation of 
acquired intangible 
assets

The Committee reviewed the purchase price allocation calculations and assumptions used in the allocations 
and concluded that both the application and methodology were consistent with previous acquisitions and the 
assumptions used were reasonable.

Share-based 
payments 

The Committee reviewed the calculation and assumptions used in calculating the share-based payments 
charge. The valuation of new awards was conducted by an external consultant and the Committee considered 
this report when concluding that the share-based payments charge contains reasonable assumptions (such as 
expected employee churn, Black-Scholes assumptions) were fair and reasonable.

Carrying value 
of goodwill and 
acquired intangible 
assets

The impairment test for the carrying value of goodwill and acquired intangible assets requires forward-looking 
value-in-use calculations that involve assumptions and judgements by the management team. The Audit 
Committee sought to review these calculations and challenge the assumptions contained within, particularly 
around future revenue growth assumptions and discount rate used. The Committee concluded that the 
impairment review had been completed in line with the provisions of IAS36 and that management had used 
a range of sensitivities to stress tests the models used. The Audit Committee was satisfied with conclusions 
reached by management.

Segmental 
reporting

The Committee assessed management assumptions when reviewing segmental disclosures. In its review, the 
Audit Committee considered the requirements of IFRS8 (“Operating Segments”) and ensured that they were in 
line with what was reviewed by the Chief Operating Decision Makers (the Executive Board). The Committee is 
satisfied that the One Platform centralised business model is a differentiator from some of the Group’s peers, 
and that a single reportable segment is an appropriate conclusion given the nature of the Group’s operations.

Allocation of Cash-
Generating Units

The Committee reviewed management’s analysis of cash-generating units (“CGUs”) and assessed its conclusion 
that there were 2 CGUs as at the date of the intangible asset impairment review (30 September). The Committee 
concluded that it was a reasonable conclusion that significant integration of the Group’s recent acquisitions 
has led to all assets generating cash inflows for the wider business, covering all subject matter areas (named 
the Data, Analytics and Insights CGU). The exception to this was MEED, which continues to be classified as an 
individual CGU due to having separately identifiable cash flows and financial results. Since the CGU assessment 
and intangible asset impairment review was performed, the Group made the LMC acquisition, which constitutes 
its own CGU. It is management’s intention to fully integrate the LMC companies into the Data, Analytics and 
Insights CGU during 2022.

Adjusted 
performance 
measures (APMs)

The Committee reviewed the Strategic Report and the financial statements contained within the Annual 
Report and Accounts to ensure that APMs were not given undue prominence over statutory numbers, that 
adjustments made to get to the APMs were both consistent with previous years and that the adjustments gave 
the reader a clearer understanding of the underlying performance of the business. The Committee is satisfied 
that the Accounts give a balanced and fair view of performance and APMs are presented in a consistent and 
clear manner, so that they contribute to the readers’ overall understanding of the accounts and the business 
performance.

52

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Directors’ Report

Audit Committee Report

The Effectiveness of Internal Controls and Risk Management Framework
The Audit Committee monitors the adequacy and effectiveness of internal control and risk management systems and ensures that a robust 
assessment of the principal risks facing the Group has been undertaken.

During the year, the Committee has assessed the documentation and review that has taken place with regards to the Group’s internal controls 
and risk management procedures. The Group’s approach to internal controls is to follow a three lines of defence model and the Committee is 
satisfied, in the main, with the control design as well as the policies and procedures in place, however the Committee recognises that there 
are actions required to remediate some IT control deficiencies and improve some manual controls, specifically within the revenue business 
process, which will be focused on during 2022. The Committee is satisfied that the review of internal controls and risk assessment were carried 
out in a robust manner. 

As a result of the unlawful distributions identified during 2020, professional advice has been sought during the year in relation to the capital 
reduction (note 23) and the level of internal scrutiny on distributable reserves has increased. Additionally, the Group now obtains professional 
advice in relation to financial reporting restructuring matters which involve reserve movements.

The Audit Committee has considered the need for a separate internal audit function and notes that there are some elements of internal audit 
that  are  currently  outsourced,  including  specific  agreed-upon  controls  reviews  in  our  Indian  businesses,  but  due to the  size  of the  Group 
and procedures in place to monitor both trading performance and internal controls, it was concluded that an entirely separate internal audit 
department was not required. The Audit Committee and Board are continually assessing the need for additional assurance procedures within 
the Group.

External Auditor
In order to maintain the independence of the external auditors, the Board has determined that non-audit work will not be offered to the external 
auditors unless there are clear efficiencies and only where such work is permitted under the Financial Reporting Council’s Ethical Standard. 

The Audit Committee annually reviews the remuneration received by the auditors for audit services and non-audit work. Their audit and non-
audit fees are set, monitored and reviewed throughout the year (see note 6 of the financial statements).

The Group has adopted the Competition and Markets Authority Order (CMA Order) and will rotate audit firms at least every 20 years and tender 
at least every 10 years. 2021 was Deloitte LLP’s (Deloitte) second year as Group auditor. 

The Committee recommends the reappointment of Deloitte for 2022. We believe that their independence, their objectivity and the effectiveness 
of the external audit is strong. This is safeguarded through their continuing challenge, their focused reporting and their discussions with both 
management and the Audit Committee in planning and concluding their work.

The Committee confirms that there are no contractual obligations that restrict the choice of external auditor.

Catherine Birkett
Chair of the Audit Committee
28 February 2022

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

53

Directors’ Remuneration Report

“A significant pillar of our 
Directors’ Report
remuneration strategy is to 
align the remuneration of our 
colleagues and Executive 
Directors to the long-term 
strategic success and ongoing 
development of the company.”

Annette Barnes, Chair of the Remuneration Committee

54

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Directors’ Report

Directors’ Remuneration Report

Unaudited information

The Remuneration Committee

I am pleased to present the Remuneration Committee report to you for 2021. 

Areas of Responsibility
The Remuneration Committee has the delegated responsibility for setting and agreeing the strategy for Executive Director remuneration 
and overseeing remuneration strategy and culture for the Group. In 2021, the Remuneration Committee has been focused on:

•  Further  enhancing  Remuneration  Governance,  including  the  implementation  of  a  remuneration  policy  for  Executive  Directors,  as 

• 

outlined in the Corporate Governance Code; 
Implementing Long-Term Incentive Plans for Executive Directors and senior teams which attract and retain key skills over the long 
term; and

•  Reviewing and approving awards made under the Long-Term Incentive Plans, aligned with the delivery of agreed Group performance 

measures. 

The key activities of the Remuneration Committee are:

•  Setting remuneration policy for Executive Directors;
•  Review and approval of Long-Term Incentive Plans for Executive Directors and senior teams; and
•  Approving awards made under the Long-Term Incentive Plans.

In terms of the three key areas of focus this year, we have made the following observations and key decisions: 

Further Enhancing Remuneration Governance
Recognising that the  previous Annual  Report  noted  a  number  of  exceptions to the  Corporate  Governance  Code, we  have  implemented 
policies and procedures that seek to address these areas. Specifically, we have: 

•  Reconstituted the Remuneration Committee to be led by an Independent Chair;
• 

Implemented  a  new  Remuneration  Policy,  which  includes  provisions  on  Executive  shareholding,  post-employment  shareholding, 
malus and clawback; 

•  Appointed me as the workforce designated Non-Executive Director. During the year I have attended two meetings with the workforce 

Committee, the VOICES Committee. Feedback from the VOICES Committee has been shared with the Board; and

•  Discussed the  content  of  CEO  Information  Sessions that the  Chief  Executive  has with  all  colleagues  on  a  regular  basis to  provide 
updates on Group progress, strategy and results. Colleagues are encouraged to ask questions in this forum. In addition, Investor Days 
have been held during the year, to update investors on key company progress. Again, questions are encouraged at these events. As a 
result of the current high level of stakeholder interaction, the Remuneration Committee did not feel it necessary to undertake further 
engagement with shareholders or the workforce to explain how the existing Executive remuneration aligns with the wider company 
pay policy. Should there be any material changes to the core elements of Executive remuneration in the future, the Committee will seek 
to engage with appropriate stakeholders.

Implementing Long-Term Incentive Plans
A significant pillar of our remuneration strategy is to align the remuneration of our colleagues and Executive Directors to the long-term 
strategic success and ongoing development of the company. Information relating to our active Long-Term Incentive Plan (LTIP) Schemes 
are noted as follows, with further detail on all active schemes documented later in my report:

•  Scheme 1 - We previously implemented an LTIP for a number of our colleagues during 2010, referred to as Scheme 1. The final tranche 

of share options to vest will occur following the publication of our 2021 results. This scheme will then be closed.

•  Scheme 2 - LTIP Scheme 2 was introduced during 2019, for a number of the senior management team that had not been in role when 

Scheme 1 was introduced, and/or had gained broader responsibilities.

•  Scheme 3 - This scheme is not yet active; however, we are currently assessing the potential options for an LTIP (Scheme 3) for our CEO, 
Mike Danson, who currently receives no salary and de minimis benefits. As Mike is a big part of the Group’s historic and future long-term 
success we are keen to ensure that appropriate remuneration is in place and that we retain his services, as CEO, over the longer term. 
As you would expect, we are taking appropriate advice from our NOMAD and from our remuneration specialist advisers in the creation 
of this scheme. In addition, we will discuss our proposed approach with our larger institutional shareholders to ensure that any scheme 
design aligns with the longer term objectives of the Group.

•  Scheme 4 - With the expected expiration of Scheme 1, the Committee recognised that a replacement LTIP for senior colleagues was 
strategically important. As such, a new scheme, Scheme 4, was approved during the year. No awards have yet been made under this 
scheme. Further detail is provided on pages 59-60.

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

55

Directors’ Report

Directors’ Remuneration Report

Reviewing and approving awards made under the Long-Term Incentive Plans
In  addition  to  implementing  appropriate  new  LTIP  schemes,  the  Remuneration  Committee  have  also  reviewed  existing  Schemes  to 
understand progress against their performance measures outlined. 

In relation to Scheme 1, the Remuneration Committee received notification from the Audit Committee that the quality of Adjusted EBITDA 
in 2021 of £58.6m was in excess of the £52m performance target and is, therefore, sufficient to satisfy the final tranche of the Scheme 
1 options. Employees within this scheme will have the opportunity to exercise their vested options following the publication of our 2021 
results (total of 6.5 million shares). Scheme 1 will then be closed. Further detail is provided in note 24.

Based upon results to date, Scheme 2 remains on target with its respective performance conditions. 

Membership and attendance 
The Committee comprises four independent Non-Executive Directors and consists of myself, Annette Barnes as Chair, Andrew Day, Julien 
Decot and Murray Legg. 

The composition of four independent Non-Executive Directors on the Committee as at 31 December 2021 is compliant with the provisions 
of the UK Corporate Governance Code. I am satisfied that the Remuneration Committee has a good balance of experience and expertise and 
is appropriately independent of the operations of the business.

During the year the Remuneration Committee met on three occasions. I am satisfied that the committee were presented with papers of 
good quality and in a timely fashion.

Attendees:

Annette Barnes

Andrew Day

Julien Decot

Murray Legg

Peter Harkness

Number of meetings

3

3

1

3

1*

*Peter’s attendance at this meeting was prior to the AGM which was held on 20 April 2021.

Terms of Reference
The Committee operates within the mandate as agreed by the Board. The terms of reference of the Remuneration Committee are available 
for inspection on request.

Remuneration Policy 
The Committee is responsible for setting the Group’s policy on Executive Directors’ remuneration and the Remuneration Committee decides 
on the remuneration package of each Executive Director. The primary objectives of the Group’s policy on Executive remuneration are that 
it  should  be  structured  so  as to  attract  and  retain  executives  of  a  high  calibre with the  skills  and  experience  necessary to  develop the 
Company successfully and, secondly, to reward them in a way which encourages the creation of value for the shareholders. The performance 
measurement of the Executive Directors and the determination of their annual remuneration package is undertaken by the Remuneration 
Committee. No Director is involved in setting their own remuneration.

56

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Directors’ Report

Directors’ Remuneration Report

The elements of remuneration that could be offered to Executive Directors are defined in the table below. Currently, only our Chief Financial 
Officer receives Executive remuneration.

Element

Purpose and link to strategy

Operation

Maximum Opportunity

Base Salary

Is payable in cash spread over  
12 monthly payments. It is set at 
an appropriate level, based on 
benchmark data, to attract and 
retain management of a high 
calibre with the necessary skills 
and credentials required to deliver 
a sustainable business model and 
drive shareholder returns.

Benefits

Provide Executive Directors with 
market-competitive benefits 
consistent with the role.

Base salaries are normally reviewed annually 
but may be reviewed at other times if the 
Committee considers this appropriate. In 
determining base salary levels and any salary 
increase, consideration is given to:
• 

the individual’s experience and the 
performance of the Group and the 
individual; 

•  salary levels at other companies of a 
similar size and complexity; and 
the pay levels and increases for other 
employees in the Group.

• 

The Committee’s Policy is to set benefits at 
an appropriate level, taking into account the 
market benchmarks and benefits offered to 
the wider workforce. Executive Directors can 
currently receive private health insurance and 
life assurance as standard benefits, which is 
in line with senior roles within the Executive 
Management Committee.

Pension

To enable the Company to offer 
market-competitive remuneration 
through the provision of 
additional retirement benefits.

Executive Directors are eligible for defined 
employer contribution funding to the 
GlobalData Pension Plan, payments into a 
personal fund and/or a cash allowance in lieu 
of pension. 

Annual Bonus 
Plan

Rewards Executive Directors for 
delivery of defined measures set 
annually by the Board. Relevant 
performance metrics are selected 
to focus on improvements in 
short term annual performance.

Long-Term 
Incentive Plan 
(LTIP)

Designed to reward delivery of 
shareholder value in the medium-
to-long term.

Pension arrangements are aligned with those 
offered to senior roles within the Executive 
Management Committee.

Annual bonus is a cash award of up to 20% of 
base salary focused on specific performance 
metrics relevant to each year. In certain 
circumstances the Committee will have the 
discretion to reduce the size (“malus”) or 
require the repayment (“clawback”) of the 
bonus following receipt by the Executive 
Director.

The Remuneration Committee can award 
share options on any of our active LTIPs. The 
Committee will take into account market 
conditions and incentives of the wider 
workforce, ensuring that UK Corporate 
Governance Code and Investment Association 
Principles are considered.  

Full details of the share option scheme 
operated by the Group are set out in note 24.

While there is no maximum 
salary level, salary increases 
will generally be in line with 
increases awarded to other 
colleagues in the Group. 

The overall level of benefits 
will depend on the cost 
of providing individual 
items and the individual’s 
circumstances. The 
maximum participation 
levels for any all-employee 
share plans which may be 
offered in the future will be 
the same as any maximum 
applicable to other 
employees (and consistent 
with any relevant tax limits).

The aggregate value 
of any annual pension 
contributions and cash 
allowance for each of 
the Executive Directors 
will be in line with the 
maximum employer pension 
contribution available to the 
majority of the workforce.

The minimum annual 
bonus is 0% of salary, if 
performance falls below 
expected standards. The 
maximum annual bonus 
opportunity is typically 20% 
of salary, payable in cash. 

No maximum, but the 
Committee will consider 
benchmark data and 
consult with shareholders 
on material awards. 

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

57

Directors’ Report

Directors’ Remuneration Report

In response to provision 36 of the UK Corporate Governance Code, the Committee implemented a policy on Executive Director shareholding 
requirements  both  during  and  post-employment. The  policy  states that  all  Executive  Directors  should  hold  100%  of their  base  salary  in 
shares within 5 years of appointment and hold on to 100% of their base salary in shares for 1 year post-employment and 50% for 2 years 
post-employment.

The  Remuneration  Policy  operated  as  intended  during  the  year,  in  terms  of  both  remuneration  performance  and  quantum.  No  further 
changes are envisaged at this time. 

The Remuneration Committee has proactively chosen not to apply discretion to any Executive Director Remuneration Elements or outcomes 
during the year. 

Non-Executive Directors’ remuneration
All  Non-Executive  Directors  have  letters  of  appointment with the  Company  and their  remuneration  is  determined  by the  Board,  having 
considered the level of fees in similar companies. 

Element

Purpose and link to strategy

Operation

Maximum Opportunity

Chairman and 
Non-Executive 
Directors’ Fees

The fees are set to attract and 
retain high calibre individuals 
by offering market-competitive 
fees, considering the time that is 
required to fulfil the relevant role.

Fees are reviewed periodically. The Chairman 
of the Board is paid a consolidated fee to 
reflect all the duties associated with the 
position. The Non-Executive Directors receive 
a base fee reflecting their duties on the Board 
and memberships of any Committees. The 
Chairs of Board Committees are eligible for 
an additional fee, reflecting the additional 
time and expertise required. The Chairman 
and Non-Executive Directors are covered 
under the Group accident and travel policy as 
it relates to work on behalf of the Company. 
Expenses in line with Company policy will be 
reimbursed and the Company will pay any tax 
incurred, as necessary.

There is no prescribed 
individual maximum but 
the fee levels will reflect 
prevailing market practice 
and salary increases across 
the Group. The maximum 
annual aggregate fee for all 
Non-Executive Directors is 
as set out in the Company’s 
Articles of Association, but 
may increase or decrease if 
the Articles of Association 
are amended to reflect such 
a change. 

Long-Term Incentive Plans
Amounts charged to the income statement:

Long-Term Incentive Plan

Senior Long-Term Incentive Plan

Year ended 31 
December 
2021

Year ended 31 
December 
2020

£m

6.3

2.9

9.2

£m

2.8

1.4

4.2

58

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Directors’ Report

Directors’ Remuneration Report

Long-Term Incentive Plan Detail

Scheme 1 (2010 Scheme)
The Group created a share option scheme (Scheme 1) during the year ended 31 December 2010 and granted the first options under 
the scheme on 1 January 2011 to certain employees. Each option granted converts to one ordinary share on exercise. In order for the 
remaining options to be exercised, the Group’s earnings before interest, taxation, depreciation and amortisation, as adjusted by the 
Remuneration Committee for significant or one-off occurrences and excluding the impact of IFRS16, must exceed the remaining target 
of £52m. The scheme expired to new entrants on 31 December 2020, but each grant expires 10 years from the date of grant.

The Remuneration Committee received notification from the Audit Committee that the quality of Adjusted EBITDA in 2021 of £58.6m 
was  in  excess  of  the  £52m  performance  target  and  is,  therefore,  sufficient  to  satisfy  the  final  tranche  of  the  Scheme  1  options. 
Employees within this scheme will have the opportunity to exercise their vested options following the publication of our 2021 results 
(total of 6.5 million shares). Scheme 1 will then be closed. 

The total charge recognised for the scheme during the twelve months to 31 December 2021 was £6.3m (2020: £2.8m). The awards of 
the scheme are settled with ordinary shares of the Company.

The pre-IFRS16 EBITDA calculation is reconciled as follows:

Adjusted EBITDA (as per results)

Adjustment for IFRS16

Pre-IFRS16 EBITDA

£m

64.4

(5.8)

58.6

Scheme 2 (2019 Scheme) 
In  October  2019 the  Group  created the  2019  share  option  scheme  (Scheme  2)  and  granted the first  options  under the  scheme  on 
31  October  2019.  Each  option  granted  converts to  one  ordinary  share  on  exercise. The  awards  shall vest  based  upon the following 
performance conditions being satisfied: 

• 

• 

100%  of  the  shares  subject  to  the  award  will  vest  provided  the  compounded  annual  growth  in  the  Group’s  Total  Shareholder 
Return (TSR) performance over the 5-year performance period is equal to or exceeds 16% per annum compounded (the “5-Year 
TSR Target”). 
The 5-Year TSR Target will be measured by taking a base-line price per share of 830p and comparing it to the sum of the average 
closing price of a share derived from the ‘official list’ over the period of 20 trading days, commencing on the business day on which 
the Group announces its annual results for the period ending 31 December 2024 and all dividends paid during the performance 
period. 

To the extent that the 5-Year TSR Target has not been met, the awards will not vest. If any of the events pursuant to the rules covering 
‘takeovers and other corporate events’ occur during the performance period or prior to the vesting date, awards shall vest as follows: 

•  Where the 5-Year TSR Target has been met at the date of the relevant event, 100% of the awards shall vest. Where the 5-Year TSR 
Target has not been achieved, but a 16% compound annual TSR has been met over the period from the commencement of the 
performance period, awards shall vest on a pro-rata basis to reflect the proportion of the performance period which has elapsed, 
although the Company shall have discretion to waive such time pro-rating if they consider it appropriate.

During 2021 the Remuneration Committee awarded 1.0 million options under this scheme (2020: 1.6 million). A charge of £2.9m (2020: 
£1.4m) has been made to the income statement. Further details are given in note 24.

Scheme 4 (2021 Scheme)
In October 2021 the Group created the 2021 share option scheme (Scheme 4). Scheme 4 is targeted at the management and senior 
colleagues  below the  Executive  Management  Committee  level. We  have  aligned the targets  of  Scheme  4 to those  of  Scheme  2, to 
ensure consistency across schemes. Performance conditions will be based on achievement of TSR targets over a 5-year period, with a 
phased performance period – with partial vesting in years 3, 4 and 5. No awards have been made on this scheme during 2021. Awards 
are expected to be made early in 2022.

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

59

Directors’ Report

Directors’ Remuneration Report

Awards will be zero priced shares and each option granted converts to one ordinary share on exercise. The awards shall vest based 
upon the following performance conditions being satisfied: 

• 

▪ 
▪ 
▪ 

• 

Shares subject to the award will vest provided the compounded annual growth in the Group’s TSR performance over the 5-year 
performance period meets the below vesting criteria:
– TSR on 10% of the award will be 6% compounded over 2022-2024 
– TSR on 20% of the award will be 16% compounded over 2022-2025
– TSR on 70% of the award will be 16% compounded over 2022-2026

The 5-Year TSR Target will be measured by taking a base-line price per share of 1385p and comparing it to the sum of the average 
closing price of a share derived from the ‘official list’ over the period of 20 trading days, commencing on the business day on which 
the Group announces its annual results for the periods ending 31 December 2024/ 2025/ 2026 and all dividends paid during the 
performance periods. 

To the extent that the TSR Targets have not been met, those awards will not vest. If any of the events pursuant to the rules covering 
‘takeovers and other corporate events’ occur during the performance period or prior to the vesting date, the Remuneration Committee 
will decide upon any vesting at its discretion in consultation with stakeholders. 

The scheme includes a malus and clawback provision.

Chairman’s scheme
During 2016, the Chairman (at that time, Bernard Cragg) carried out an executive role and was awarded 250,000 share options. These 
were time-based options, rather than being dependent on performance targets. 125,000 of these options vested and were exercised 
in 2019 and the remaining 125,000 vested on 31 January 2021 and were exercised on 26 April 2021. This scheme is now closed.

During the year the Group purchased an aggregate amount of 2,860,648 shares at a total market value of £46.5m. The purchased shares 
will be held in treasury and in the Group’s Employee Benefit Trust for the purpose of satisfying the exercise of share options under the 
Company’s Employee Share Option Plan.

The total charge recognised for the schemes during the year ended 31 December 2021 was £9.2m (2020: £4.2m). The awards of the scheme 
are settled with ordinary shares of the Company.

Directors’ service agreements  
It is the Group’s policy that Directors should not have service agreements with notice periods capable of exceeding 12 months. The existing 
service agreements have neither fixed terms nor contractual termination payments but do have fixed notice periods. The details of the 
service agreements of the Directors as at 28 February 2022 are:

Murray Legg

Mike Danson

Graham Lilley

Annette Barnes

Peter Harkness

Andrew Day

Catherine Birkett

Julien Decot

Contract date

Notice period

23 February 2016

1 October 2008

5 April 2021

24 January 2017

12 April 2016

24 January 2017

1 March 2021

30 April 2021

3 months

12 months

12 months

3 months

3 months

3 months

3 months

3 months

60

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Directors’ Report

Directors’ Remuneration Report

Directors’ emoluments Audited information

Year ended 31 
December 2021

Basic salary

Bonus

£000s

£000s

Bernard Cragg1

Murray Legg

Mike Danson

Graham Lilley

Annette Barnes

Peter Harkness

Andrew Day

Elizabeth Pritchard2

Catherine Birkett

Julien Decot

1Relates to a 4 month period

2Relates to a 10 week period

47

90

-

242

58

52

50

10

51

34

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Share-based 
payment

£000s

1,902

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Other 
benefits

£000s

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Total

Total Fixed

£000s

1,949

90

-

242

58

52

50

10

51

34

£000s

47

90

-

242

58

52

50

10

51

34

Total 
Variable

£000s

1,902

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Elizabeth Pritchard joined the Board on 26 March 2021. However, it was mutually agreed on 24 June 2021 that she would step down with 
immediate effect due to a potential conflict of interest in relation to an executive appointment.  

Year ended 31 
December 2020

Basic salary

Bonus1

Share-based 
payment

Other 
benefits

Total

Total Fixed

Total 
Variable

£000s

£000s

£000s

£000s

£000s

£000s

£000s

Bernard Cragg

Mike Danson

Graham Lilley

Murray Legg

Peter Harkness

Annette Barnes

Andrew Day

150

-

200

40

40

30

30

1

-

50

-

1

-

-

-

-

609

-

-

-

-

1

-

-

-

-

5

1

152

-

859

40

41

35

31

150

-

200

40

40

30

30

2

-

659

-

1

5

1

1Bonus payments to Bernard Cragg and Peter Harkness are in relation to long service awards.

As  at  31  December  2021,  Graham  Lilley  had  400,000  share  options  in  issue  (2020:  400,000), which  included  100,000  share  options  in 
Scheme 1 and 300,000 in Scheme 2. Further details are given in note 24. No other Directors as at 31 December 2021 had share options. 

The other benefits consist of travel expenses to GlobalData offices. Share-based payment represents equity settled income received on 
the vesting of share options in the year.  

By order of the Board

Annette Barnes
Chair of the Remuneration Committee
28 February 2022

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

61

Directors’ Report

Statement of Directors’ responsibilities in respect of the Annual Report 
and the financial statements

The Directors are responsible for preparing the Annual Report and the financial statements in accordance with applicable law and regulations. 

Company law requires the Directors to prepare financial statements for each financial year. Under that law the Directors have elected to 
prepare the Group financial statements in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs) as issued by the IASB and 
the parent company financial statements in accordance with United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice (United Kingdom 
Accounting Standards and applicable law), including FRS 101 “Reduced Disclosure Framework”. Under company law the Directors must not 
approve the financial statements unless they are satisfied that they give a true and fair view of the state of affairs and profit or loss of the 
Company and the Group for that period. 

In preparing these financial statements, the Directors are required to:

Select suitable accounting policies and then apply them consistently;

• 
•  Make judgements and accounting estimates that are reasonable and prudent;
• 

 Present  information,  including  accounting  policies,  in  a  manner  that  provides  relevant,  reliable,  comparable  and  understandable 
information;
State whether applicable accounting standards have been followed, subject to any material departures disclosed and explained in the 
financial statements; and
Prepare the financial statements on the going concern basis unless it is inappropriate to presume that the Company will continue in 
business.  

• 

• 

The Directors are responsible for keeping adequate accounting records that are sufficient to show and explain the Company’s transactions 
and  disclose with  reasonable  accuracy  at  any time the financial  position  of the  Company  and  enable them to  ensure that the financial 
statements comply with the Companies Act 2006. They are also responsible for safeguarding the assets of the Company and hence for 
taking reasonable steps for the prevention and detection of fraud and other irregularities.

The  Directors  are  responsible  for  the  maintenance  and  integrity  of  the  corporate  and  financial  information  included  on  the  Company’s 
website. Legislation in the United Kingdom governing the preparation and dissemination of financial statements may differ from legislation 
in other jurisdictions.

Auditors
A resolution to reappoint Deloitte LLP as auditors to the Company will be proposed at the Annual General Meeting.

Disclosure of information to auditors
The Directors confirm that: so far as each Director is aware, there is no relevant audit information of which the Group’s auditors are unaware, 
and the Directors have taken all steps that they ought to have taken in order to make themselves aware of any relevant audit information 
and establish that the Group’s auditors are aware of that information.

Annual General Meeting
The Annual General Meeting will be held on 26 April 2022 at John Carpenter House, John Carpenter Street, London EC4Y 0AN at 10am. 

Approved by the Board and signed on its behalf by

Mike Danson
Chief Executive
28 February 2022

62

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Directors’ Remuneration Report

“The Group has continued to 
Directors’ Report
deliver and execute against 
its strategy. Our 8% organic 
underlying constant currency 
revenue growth (6% reported 
revenue growth) and margin 
expansion demonstrate clear 
progress against our two 
financial targets.”

Mike Danson, Chief Executive Officer

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

63

“Our ESG activities focus  
on our people, our customers, 
our environment and our 
communities. These  
activities are key to our  
efforts to safeguard 
GlobalData’s long- 
term viability and  
sustainable growth.”

Murray Legg, Chairman

Independent Auditor’s Report

Independent Auditor’s Report to the Members of GlobalData Plc 

Report on the audit of the financial statements

1. OPINION

In our opinion:
• 

the financial statements of GlobalData plc (the ‘parent company’) and its subsidiaries (the ‘Group’) give a true and fair view of the 
state of the Group’s and of the parent company’s affairs as at 31 December 2021 and of the Group’s profit for the year then ended; 

• 

• 

• 

the Group financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with United Kingdom adopted international 
accounting standards; 

the parent company financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with United Kingdom Generally Accepted 
Accounting Practice, including Financial Reporting Standard 101 “Reduced Disclosure Framework”; and 

the financial statements have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006.

We have audited the financial statements which comprise:
• 
• 
• 
• 
• 
• 
• 

the consolidated income statement;
the consolidated statement of comprehensive income;
the consolidated and parent company statements of financial position;
the consolidated and parent company statements of changes in equity;
the consolidated statement of cash flows;
the related notes 1 to 28 to the consolidated financial statements; and 
the related notes 1 to 14 to the parent company financial statements

The financial reporting framework that has been applied in the preparation of the Group financial statements is applicable law and 
United Kingdom adopted international accounting standards. The financial reporting framework that has been applied in the preparation 
of the parent company financial statements is applicable law and United Kingdom Accounting Standards, including FRS 101 “Reduced 
Disclosure Framework”.

2. BASIS FOR OPINION

We conducted our audit in accordance with International Standards on Auditing (UK) (ISAs (UK)) and applicable law. Our responsibilities 
under those standards are further described in the auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements section of our report. 

We are independent of the Group and the parent company in accordance with the ethical requirements that are relevant to our audit of the 
financial statements in the UK, including the Financial Reporting Council’s (the ‘FRC’s’) Ethical Standard as applied to listed entities, and 
we have fulfilled our other ethical responsibilities in accordance with these requirements. 

We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our opinion.

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

65

Independent Auditor’s Report

Independent Auditor’s Report to the Members of GlobalData Plc 

3. SUMMARY OF OUR AUDIT APPROACH

Key audit matters

The key audit matters that we identified in the current year were:
• 
• 

the accuracy of subscription revenue recognition; 
the recoverability of the MEED cash-generating unit in respect of the carrying value of goodwill and intangible 
assets; and
the identification and valuation of identified intangibles within the acquisitions of the Life Sciences business of 
IHS Markit Limited, LMCA Holdings and LMCI Holdings Limited.

• 

Within this report, key audit matters are identified as follows:

             Newly identified 

             Increased level of risk 

             Similar level of risk 

             Decreased level of risk 

Materiality

Scoping

Our materiality was based upon profit before tax adjusted to exclude the amortisation of acquired intangible 
assets, as we have determined this is an important metric to the users of the financial statements. The materiality 
that we used for the Group financial statements was £1,700,000 (2020: £1,500,000), representing 4.7% of profit 
before tax adjusted to exclude the amortisation of acquired intangible assets.

We performed full scope audits or audits of specified balances and transactions of the principal entities within 
the Group, comprising the Group’s operations within the UK, the US, India and the United Arab Emirates. These in-
scope locations represent the key trading entities within the Group and account for 91% of Group revenue, 98% of 
profit before tax adjusted to exclude the amortisation of acquired intangible assets and 98% of Group net assets.

Significant 
changes in our 
approach

We have removed the key audit matter reported in the prior year audit report in relation to the determination of 
cash-generating units “CGUs” for assessing the recoverability of the carrying value of goodwill and intangible 
assets, as the level of judgement required has reduced significantly in the current year and there are no facts or 
circumstances which would cause us to question the previous conclusions. 

We have identified a new key audit matter in the current year relating to the recoverability of the MEED cash-
generating unit in respect of the carrying value of goodwill and intangible assets, as a result of the sensitivity of 
management’s cash flow model to the assumptions relating to growth in profitability and the discount rate. 

We have identified a new key audit matter in relation to the determination and valuation of identified intangibles 
within the acquisitions of the Life Sciences business of IHS Markit Limited, LMCA Holdings and LMCI Holdings 
Limited as a result of the magnitude of the acquisitions in the context of the wider Group. 

We have removed the key audit matter reported in the prior year audit report in relation to the modification of the 
share-based payment Long-Term Incentive Plan as there have been no modifications in the current year. 

We have removed the key audit matter reported in the prior year audit report in relation to the distributions made 
other than in compliance with the Companies Act as there were no additional distributions identified in the 
current year. 

66

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Independent Auditor’s Report

Independent Auditor’s Report to the Members of GlobalData Plc 

4. CONCLUSIONS RELATING TO GOING CONCERN

In auditing the financial statements, we have concluded that the directors’ use of the going concern basis of accounting in the preparation 
of the financial statements is appropriate.

Our evaluation of the directors’ assessment of the Group’s and parent company’s ability to continue to adopt the going concern basis of 
accounting included:

•  consideration of the cash held by the Group of £22.6m, net debt of £177.6m and further undrawn facilities of £18.0m, in the context of 

the operating cash flow needs of the Group;

•  consideration of the expiry date of the Group’s borrowing facilities, which mature at the end of April 2023, and whether there is any 

current evidence to indicate that a renewal of those facilities may not occur;  

•  assessment and sensitivity of the headroom on the Group’s cash flow forecasts including the assumptions within the one-year detailed 

budget;

•  evaluation of the Group’s borrowing covenants and review of the scenarios which could lead to a covenant breach and evaluation of 

whether any of those scenarios are reasonably possible;

•  assessment of the suitability of the model used by the Group to forecast cash flows, including testing of clerical accuracy of the model; 

and 

•  assessment of the historical accuracy of cash flow forecasts prepared by management.

Based on the work we have performed, we have not identified any material uncertainties relating to events or conditions that, individually 
or collectively, may cast significant doubt on the Group’s and parent company’s ability to continue as a going concern for a period of at least 
twelve months from when the financial statements are authorised for issue.

Our responsibilities and the responsibilities of the directors with respect to going concern are described in the relevant sections of this 
report.

5. KEY AUDIT MATTERS

Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgement, were of most significance in our audit of the financial statements 
of  the  current  period  and  include  the  most  significant  assessed  risks  of  material  misstatement  (whether  or  not  due  to  fraud)  that  we 
identified. These matters included those which had the greatest effect on: the overall audit strategy, the allocation of resources in the 
audit; and directing the efforts of the engagement team.

These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the financial statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and 
we do not provide a separate opinion on these matters.

5.1. Accuracy of subscription revenue recognition

Key audit 
matter 
description

The specific nature of the risk of material misstatement in revenue recognition varies across the Group’s revenue 
streams, with total Group revenue of £189.3m (2020: £178.4m).

The main source of revenue for the Group is subscription revenue for data, analytics and insights as set out by 
management in the Strategic Report and note 5 to the consolidated financial statements. Management’s accounting 
policy is to recognise subscription revenue evenly over the period of the contractual term as the performance 
obligations are satisfied evenly over the term of subscription. Revenue recognised over time represents 83% of 
consolidated revenue. 

Due to the complexity of the manual adjustments required in releasing revenue to the consolidated income statement, 
we identified a significant risk due to fraud or error in relation to the accuracy of revenue arising from such manual 
adjustments. The Group’s revenue recognition accounting policies are disclosed in note 2 to the consolidated financial 
statements. 

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

67

Independent Auditor’s Report

Independent Auditor’s Report to the Members of GlobalData Plc 

How the 
scope of 
our audit 
responded to 
the key audit 
matter

We obtained an understanding of the Group’s business model and terms set out in customer contracts and the sales 
process. We obtained an understanding of relevant controls over the sales process from ordering to cash collection, 
including those related to the releasing of revenue from deferred revenue. 

The procedures we performed across the entities within our audit scope included the following: 
•  we tested relevant controls in relation to revenue recognition;
•  we used data analytics procedures to recalculate the subscription revenue recognised in the year and the deferred 
revenue balance recorded at the year end, to identify where actual recorded revenue differed from the recalculated 
amount to then subject such amounts to further testing procedures;

•  we obtained evidence to determine whether a sample of variances which were identified through our data analytics 
were correctly accounted for; this included performing tests of detail to corroborate management’s explanations by 
reviewing third party documentation; and

•  we performed tests of detail of the accuracy, occurrence and completeness for a sample of revenue transactions, 
through obtaining and reviewing relevant customer contracts and fulfilment data to assess whether revenue was 
appropriately recorded across the term.

Key 
observations

Based on the audit procedures performed we concluded that revenue from subscriptions was not materially misstated 
across the term.

5.2. The recoverability of the MEED cash-generating unit in respect of the carrying value of goodwill and intangible assets 

Key audit 
matter 
description

The MEED cash-generating unit comprises an asset base of £15.9m including £13.8m of goodwill and intangible 
assets. Where goodwill exists, IAS 36 requires that management perform an annual impairment assessment to 
compare the balance sheet carrying value of each cash-generating unit (‘CGU’) to the higher of fair value less costs to 
sell and value in use.

Our risk assessment identified that the MEED CGU had a low level of headroom in management’s assessment of the 
carrying value against the discounted cash flows expected to be generated within management’s forecasts. The MEED 
CGU is more sensitive to the growth assumptions and discount rate used within management’s cash flow model.

Management has highlighted impairment of goodwill in relation to the MEED CGU as a key source of estimation 
uncertainty in note 1 and provided disclosure on the sensitivity of key assumptions to reasonably possible changes in 
note 13. 

How the 
scope of 
our audit 
responded to 
the key audit 
matter

Our procedures included: 
•  gaining an understanding of management’s process for developing the short-term cash flow assumptions and the 

relevant controls mitigating the risks identified in the impairment process;

•  meeting with management to understand and challenge the growth forecasts through consideration of historical 

trends and obtaining evidence to support forward-looking assumptions; 

•  understanding  and  challenging  key  assumptions  underpinning  management’s  forecast  growth,  including  by 

reference to past performance;

•  assessing and challenging forecast cash flows and long-term growth rates using external market data;
• 

re-performing management’s sensitivity analysis on their cash flow model to understand the impact of changing 
key assumptions and to understand the breakeven point; 

•  assessing the historical accuracy of forecasts by comparing actual financial results to the previous budgets; 
•  working with internal valuation specialists to perform an independent calculation of the discount rates used in the 

model; 
testing the integrity of the model through testing mechanical and formulaic accuracy; and
reviewing the adequacy of management’s disclosure against the requirements of IAS 36.

• 
• 

Key 
observations

We are satisfied that management’s conclusion that no impairment is required is acceptable. We concur with 
management’s assessment that there are reasonably possible scenarios which could result in an impairment being 
required. 

We consider the disclosure in the judgements and estimates section of note 1 provided concerning the impairment of 
assets in the MEED CGU together with the reasonably possible change sensitivity provided in note 13 to comply with 
the requirements of IAS 36. 

68

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Independent Auditor’s Report

Independent Auditor’s Report to the Members of GlobalData Plc 

5.3. The identification and valuation of identified intangibles within the acquisitions of the Life Sciences business of IHS 
Markit Limited, LMCA Holdings and LMCI Holdings Limited  

Key audit 
matter 
description

How the 
scope of 
our audit 
responded 
to the key 
audit matter

During the year the Group made two significant acquisitions as disclosed in the Strategic Report and notes 13 and 27 
of the financial statements. On 1 November 2021 the Group completed the acquisition of the Life Sciences business of 
IHS Markit Limited, a trade and assets transfer with consideration paid of $50m. Following this, on 15 December 2021, 
the Group completed the acquisition of two subsidiary entities, LMCA Holdings Limited and LMCI Holdings Limited 
with consideration paid of £72.7m. We identified these acquisitions as a key audit matter because of the size of the 
transactions in the context of Group materiality and the judgements associated with the identification and valuation of 
intangible assets accounted for in accordance with IFRS 3 Business Combinations.   

We engaged with internal valuation specialists to evaluate management’s valuation of intangible assets acquired 
during the transactions.

We performed procedures to evaluate the competence, capabilities and objectivity of management’s third-party expert 
used to complete the purchase price allocation exercise. 

We have assessed whether management identified and recognised all intangible assets acquired within the 
transactions through gaining an understanding of the acquired businesses. 

We inspected a combination of historical internal and external evidence to assess the assumptions used by 
management within their valuations, including a critical assessment of the valuation methods used to value the 
different assets recognised, and to assess their compliance with the accounting standards.

We assessed the appropriateness of the useful lives of the acquired assets recorded by management to ensure 
that they appropriately reflected the expected period of generation of future economic benefits from the use of the 
acquired assets.

We reviewed the disclosure which management has made in relation to these acquisitions within the financial 
statements and considered its consistency with the fact pattern of our audit work.

Key 
observations

Based on the audit procedures performed, we concluded that management’s identification and valuation of intangible 
assets within the acquisitions, and their associated disclosures within the financial statements, are appropriate.

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

69

Independent Auditor’s Report

Independent Auditor’s Report to the Members of GlobalData Plc 

6. OUR APPLICATION OF MATERIALITY

6.1. Materiality
We define materiality as the magnitude of misstatement in the financial statements that makes it probable that the economic decisions of 
a reasonably knowledgeable person would be changed or influenced. We use materiality both in planning the scope of our audit work and 
in evaluating the results of our work.

Based on our professional judgement, we determined materiality for the financial statements as a whole as follows:

Group financial statements

Parent company financial statements

Materiality

£1,700,000 (2020: £1,500,000)

£715,000 (2020: £525,000)

Basis for 
determining 
materiality

We used profit before tax, adjusted to exclude the 
amortisation of acquired intangible assets, as our basis 
for materiality.  

Parent company materiality equates to 2% of net 
assets, which has been capped at 50% of Group 
performance materiality. 

The materiality that we used for the Group financial 
statements was £1,700,000 representing 4.7% of 
profit before tax excluding amortisation of acquired 
intangible assets.

Rationale for 
the benchmark 
applied

We considered a range of measures, including revenue, 
profit before tax, Adjusted EBITDA and profit before 
tax, adjusted to exclude the amortisation of acquired 
intangible assets.  

Net assets are typically considered an appropriate 
benchmark for materiality as the parent company 
predominantly holds investments in trading 
subsidiaries.

We used profit before tax adjusted to exclude the 
amortisation of acquired intangible assets as the 
amortisation has a significant impact on profit before 
tax and was subject to specific audit procedures. 
Its exclusion resulted in a materiality level that was 
more reflective of the profit generation of the Group 
before such acquisition-related charges.  We used a 
profit before tax-based measure rather than Adjusted 
EBITDA as the latter is less closely aligned to measures 
calculated in accordance with generally accepted 
accounting principles.

We highlight that a materiality of £1,700,000 
represents 0.9% of revenue, 7.8% of profit before tax 
and 2.6% of Adjusted EBITDA.

Profit before tax

£33m

Group materiality £1.7m

Component materiality range
£0.50m to £0.715m

Audit Committee reporting threshold
£0.09m

 Profit before tax   

 Group materiality

70

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Independent Auditor’s Report

Independent Auditor’s Report to the Members of GlobalData Plc 

6.2. Performance materiality
We set performance materiality at a level lower than materiality to reduce the probability that, in aggregate, uncorrected and undetected 
misstatements exceed the materiality for the financial statements as a whole. 

Performance 
materiality

Basis and 
rationale for 
determining 
performance 
materiality

Group financial statements

Parent company financial statements

60% (2020: 70%) of Group materiality

70% (2020: 70%) of parent company materiality

In determining performance materiality, we considered 
our past experience of the Group and our risk 
assessment, including our assessment of the Group’s 
control environment and the value and volume of 
corrected and uncorrected misstatements identified 
during the prior year audit, as well as the likelihood of 
these recurring in the current year.

In determining performance materiality, we considered 
our past experience of the Group and our risk 
assessment, including our assessment of the Group’s 
control environment and the value and volume of 
corrected and uncorrected misstatements identified 
during the prior year audit, as well as the likelihood of 
these recurring in the current year.

The reduction in Group performance materiality as 
a proportion of Group materiality in the current year 
was driven by the cumulative impact of uncorrected 
misstatements identified during our prior year audit.

6.3. Error reporting threshold
We agreed with the Audit Committee that we would report to the Committee all audit differences in excess of £85,000 (2020: £50,000), as 
well as differences below that threshold that, in our view, warranted reporting on qualitative grounds. We also report to the Audit Committee 
on disclosure matters that we identified when assessing the overall presentation of the financial statements.

7. AN OVERVIEW OF THE SCOPE OF OUR AUDIT

7.1. Identification and scoping of components
Our group audit was scoped by obtaining an understanding of the Group and its environment, including group-wide controls and assessing 
the  risks  of  material  misstatement  at  the  group  level.  Our  component  selection  was  based  on  the  selection  of  material  balances  and 
components,  with  additional  consideration  of  whether,  at  an  aggregated  level,  we  had  reduced  the  risk  of  material  misstatement  to  an 
acceptably low level. 

Based on that assessment we performed full scope or an audit of specified balances and transactions on the principal trading entities within 
the UK, India and the United Arab Emirates. 

The in-scope locations (those at which a full scope audit or an audit of specified balances and transactions was performed as part of a group 
audit) represent 91% of revenue, 98% of profit before tax adjusted to exclude intangible amortisation and 98% of net assets. 

9%

10%

8%

2%

2% 4%

Revenue

Profit 
before tax

Net assets

81%

90%

94%

 Full audit scope   

 Specified audit procedures   

 Review at Group level

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

71

Independent Auditor’s Report

Independent Auditor’s Report to the Members of GlobalData Plc 

7.2. Our consideration of the control environment 
In assessing the control environment of the Group, we identified four relevant IT systems and obtained an understanding of the relevant 
general IT controls associated with the Group’s key accounting and reporting systems. We tested the general IT controls of two relevant 
systems: the main accounting system Sun Accounting and the revenue system Salesforce; we obtained an understanding of two additional 
systems, the accounts payable system Compleat and the payroll system Flexipay. We obtained an understanding of the relevant controls 
associated with the revenue, deferred income and accounts receivables business processes. 

We planned to test relevant controls in relation to revenue with the aim of moving towards a controls reliance approach in future years. 
We were not able to rely on controls in the current year in respect of any business processes.  We were not able to take a controls reliance 
approach  due  to  a  combination  of  the  IT  control  deficiencies  and  a  number  of  manual  control  deficiencies  identified,  as  discussed  by 
management within their Audit Committee Report on page 53. We extended the scope of our audit procedures in response to the deficiencies 
identified by performing specific procedures to address the incremental risk and performing additional substantive audit work.

7.3. Working with other auditors 
We used one component audit team in India during the audit of the financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2021 (2020: one) 
and we were in regular contact with them throughout the year. The Group team conducted the audit of MEED, a component based in the 
United Arab Emirates. We overcame the challenges in component oversight which arose as a result of the travel restrictions brought about 
by the COVID-19 pandemic through regular status calls with senior audit personnel, including the component partner. 

We  held  team  briefings  for  the  component  audit  team,  to  discuss  the  Group  risk  assessment  and  audit  instructions,  to  confirm  their 
understanding of the business and to discuss their local risk assessment. Throughout the audit we maintained regular contact in order to 
direct and supervise their audit approach. We virtually attended their audit planning and close meetings with local management, performed 
technology-enabled remote reviews of their working papers and reviewed their reporting to us on the findings of their work.

8. OTHER INFORMATION

The other information comprises the information included in the annual report, other than the financial statements and our auditor’s report 
thereon. The directors are responsible for the other information contained within the annual report.

Our opinion on the financial statements does not cover the other information and, except to the extent otherwise explicitly stated in our 
report, we do not express any form of assurance conclusion thereon.

Our responsibility is to read the other information and, in doing so, consider whether the other information is materially inconsistent with the 
financial statements or our knowledge obtained in the course of our audit, or otherwise appears to be materially misstated.

If we identify such material inconsistencies or apparent material misstatements, we are required to determine whether this gives rise to 
a  material  misstatement  in the financial  statements themselves.  If,  based  on the work we  have  performed, we  conclude that there  is  a 
material misstatement of this other information, we are required to report that fact.  

We have nothing to report in this regard.

9. RESPONSIBILITIES OF DIRECTORS

As  explained  more  fully  in  the  directors’  responsibilities  statement,  the  directors  are  responsible  for  the  preparation  of  the  financial 
statements and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair view, and for such internal control as the directors determine is necessary 
to enable the preparation of financial statements that are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error.

In preparing the financial statements, the directors are responsible for assessing the Group’s and the parent company’s ability to continue 
as a going concern, disclosing as applicable, matters related to going concern and using the going concern basis of accounting unless the 
directors either intend to liquidate the Group or the parent company or to cease operations, or have no realistic alternative but to do so.

72

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

 
Independent Auditor’s Report

Independent Auditor’s Report to the Members of GlobalData Plc 

10. AUDITOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES FOR THE AUDIT OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements as a whole are free from material misstatement, 
whether due to fraud or error, and to issue an auditor’s report that includes our opinion. Reasonable assurance is a high level of assurance, 
but is not a guarantee that an audit conducted in accordance with ISAs (UK) will always detect a material misstatement when it exists. 
Misstatements  can  arise  from  fraud  or  error  and  are  considered  material  if,  individually  or  in  the  aggregate,  they  could  reasonably  be 
expected to influence the economic decisions of users taken on the basis of these financial statements.

A further description of our responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements is located on the FRC’s website at: www.frc.org.uk/
auditorsresponsibilities. This description forms part of our auditor’s report.

11. EXTENT TO WHICH THE AUDIT WAS CONSIDERED CAPABLE OF DETECTING IRREGULARITIES,  
INCLUDING FRAUD 

Irregularities,  including  fraud,  are  instances  of  non-compliance  with  laws  and  regulations.  We  design  procedures  in  line  with  our 
responsibilities,  outlined  above,  to  detect  material  misstatements  in  respect  of  irregularities,  including  fraud.  The  extent  to  which  our 
procedures are capable of detecting irregularities, including fraud, is detailed below. 

11.1. Identifying and assessing potential risks related to irregularities
In identifying and assessing risks of material misstatement in respect of irregularities, including fraud and non-compliance with laws and 
regulations, we considered the following:
• 

the nature of the industry and sector, control environment and business performance including the design of the Group’s remuneration 
policies, key drivers for directors’ remuneration, bonus levels and performance targets;
the Group’s own assessment of the risks that irregularities may occur either as a result of fraud or error;
results  of  our  enquiries  of  management  and  the  Audit  Committee  about  their  own  identification  and  assessment  of  the  risks  of 
irregularities; 

• 
• 

•  any matters we identified having obtained and reviewed the Group’s documentation of their policies and procedures relating to:

• 

identifying, evaluating and complying with laws and regulations and whether they were aware of any instances of non-compliance 
including the dividends that were made otherwise than in accordance with the Companies Act 2006 (see note 23 of the consolidated 
financial statements);

• 

the internal controls established to mitigate risks of fraud or non-compliance with laws and regulations; and

•  detecting and responding to the risks of fraud and whether they have knowledge of any actual, suspected or alleged fraud; and
• 
the  matters  discussed  among  the  audit  engagement  team  including  the  significant  component  audit  team  and  relevant  internal 
specialists, including tax, valuations, IT and share-based payment specialists regarding how and where fraud might occur in the financial 
statements and any potential indicators of fraud.

As a result of these procedures, we considered the opportunities and incentives that may exist within the Group for fraud and identified 
the greatest potential for fraud in the accuracy of subscription revenue recognition. In common with all audits under ISAs (UK), we are also 
required to perform specific procedures to respond to the risk of management override.

We also obtained an understanding of the legal and regulatory framework that the Group operates in, focusing on provisions of those laws 
and regulations that had a direct effect on the determination of material amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. The key laws 
and regulations we considered in this context included the UK Companies Act and tax legislation in the jurisdictions in which the Group 
operates.

In  addition,  we  considered  provisions  of  other  laws  and  regulations  that  do  not  have  a  direct  effect  on  the  financial  statements  but 
compliance with which may be fundamental to the Group’s ability to operate or to avoid a material penalty.

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

73

 
Independent Auditor’s Report

Independent Auditor’s Report to the Members of GlobalData Plc 

11.2. Audit response to risks identified
As a result of performing the above, we identified accuracy of subscription revenue recognised as a key audit matter related to the potential 
risk of fraud. The key audit matters section of our report explains the matter in more detail and also describes the specific procedures we 
performed in response to that key audit matter.

In addition to the above our procedures to respond to risks identified included the following:
• 

reviewing the financial statement disclosures and testing to supporting documentation to assess compliance with provisions of relevant 
laws and regulations described as having a direct effect on the financial statements;

•  enquiring of management, the audit committee and in-house legal counsel concerning actual and potential litigation and claims; 
•  performing analytical procedures to identify any unusual or unexpected relationships that may indicate risks of material misstatement 

• 
• 

due to fraud; 
reading minutes of meetings of those charged with governance; and 
in  addressing  the  risk  of  fraud  through  management  override  of  controls,  testing  the  appropriateness  of  journal  entries  and  other 
adjustments; assessing whether the judgements made in making accounting estimates are indicative of a potential bias; and evaluating 
the business rationale of any significant transactions that are unusual or outside the normal course of business. 

We  also  communicated  relevant  identified  laws  and  regulations  and  potential  fraud  risks  to  all  engagement  team  members  including 
internal specialists and significant component audit teams, and remained alert to any indications of fraud or non-compliance with laws and 
regulations throughout the audit.

74

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

 
Independent Auditor’s Report

Independent Auditor’s Report to the Members of GlobalData Plc 

Report on other legal and regulatory requirements

12. OPINIONS ON OTHER MATTERS PRESCRIBED BY THE COMPANIES ACT 2006

In our opinion, based on the work undertaken in the course of the audit:
• 

the information given in the Strategic Report and the Directors’ Report for the financial year for which the financial statements are 
prepared is consistent with the financial statements; and
the Strategic Report and the Directors’ Report have been prepared in accordance with applicable legal requirements.

• 

In the light of the knowledge and understanding of the Group and the parent company and their environment obtained in the course of 
the audit, we have not identified any material misstatements in the Strategic Report or the Directors’ Report.

13. MATTERS ON WHICH WE ARE REQUIRED TO REPORT BY EXCEPTION

13.1. Adequacy of explanations received and accounting records
Under the Companies Act 2006 we are required to report to you if, in our opinion:
•  we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit; or
•  adequate accounting records have not been kept by the parent company, or returns adequate for our audit have not been received from 

branches not visited by us; or
the parent company financial statements are not in agreement with the accounting records and returns.

• 

We have nothing to report in respect of these matters.

13.2. Directors’ remuneration
Under the Companies Act 2006 we are also required to report if in our opinion certain disclosures of directors’ remuneration have not been made.

We have nothing to report in respect of this matter.

14. USE OF OUR REPORT
This report is made solely to the Company’s members, as a body, in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the Companies Act 2006. Our 
audit work has been undertaken so that we might state to the Company’s members those matters we are required to state to them in an 
auditor’s report and for no other purpose. To the fullest extent permitted by law, we do not accept or assume responsibility to anyone other 
than the Company and the Company’s members as a body, for our audit work, for this report, or for the opinions we have formed.

Jon Young FCA (Senior Statutory Auditor)
For and on behalf of Deloitte LLP
Statutory Auditor
London, United Kingdom
28 February 2022

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

75

 
Consolidated Income Statement

Continuing operations

Revenue

Operating expenses

Losses on trade receivables

Other income

Operating profit

Net finance costs

Profit before tax 

Income tax expense

Profit for the year

Attributable to:

Equity holders of the parent

Earnings per share attributable to equity holders: 

Basic earnings per share (pence)

Diluted earnings per share (pence)

Reconciliation to Adjusted EBITDA1:

Operating profit

Depreciation

Amortisation of software

Adjusting items

Adjusted EBITDA1

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these financial statements.

Notes

Year ended 31 
December 2021

Year ended 31 
December 2020

5

6

6

10

11

12

12

7

£m

189.3

(150.8)

(1.2)

0.9

38.2

(5.6)

32.6

(7.7)

24.9

24.9

21.9

20.2

38.2

6.8

0.9

18.5

64.4

£m

178.4

(145.4)

(1.3)

1.3

33.0

(4.4)

28.6

(6.0)

22.6

22.6

19.4

18.1

33.0

7.0

1.1

15.6

56.7

1 We define Adjusted EBITDA as EBITDA adjusted to exclude costs associated with acquisitions, restructuring of the Group, share-based 
payments, impairment, unrealised operating exchange rate movements and the impact of foreign exchange contracts. We present Adjusted 
EBITDA as additional information because it is used internally as a key indicator to assess financial performance. However, other companies 
may present Adjusted EBITDA differently. EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA are not measures of financial performance under IFRS and should 
not  be  considered  as  an  alternative to  operating  profit  or  as  a  measure  of  liquidity  or  an  alternative to  net  income  as  indicators  of  our 
operating  performance  or  any  other  measure  of  performance  derived  in  accordance  with  IFRS.  Adjusted  EBITDA  margin  is  defined  as: 
Adjusted EBITDA as a percentage of revenue.

76

    ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income

Profit for the year

Other comprehensive income

Items that will be classified subsequently to profit or loss when specific conditions are met:

Net exchange losses on translation of foreign entities

Other comprehensive loss, net of tax

Total comprehensive income for the year

Attributable to:

Equity holders of the parent

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these financial statements.

Year ended 31 
December 2021

Year ended 31 
December 2020

£m

24.9

(0.5)

(0.5)

24.4

£m

22.6

(0.6)

(0.6)

22.0

24.4

22.0

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

77

 
Consolidated Statement of Financial Position

Notes

31 December 2021

31 December 2020

Non-current assets

Property, plant and equipment

Intangible assets

Net investment in sub lease

Trade and other receivables

Deferred tax assets

Current assets

Trade and other receivables 

Current tax receivable

Short-term derivative assets

Cash and cash equivalents

Total assets

Current liabilities

Trade and other payables 

Short-term borrowings

Short-term lease liabilities

Current tax payable

Short-term derivative liabilities

Short-term provisions

Net current liabilities

Non-current liabilities

Long-term provisions

Deferred tax liabilities

Long-term derivative liabilities

Long-term lease liabilities

Long-term borrowings

Total liabilities

Net assets

Equity

Share capital

Share premium account

Treasury reserve

Other reserve

Merger reserve

Foreign currency translation reserve

Retained profit

Equity attributable to equity holders of the parent

14

13

28

18

17

16

19

20

15

16

22

22

18

16

15

20

23

23

23

23

23

23

£m

35.3

347.7

0.1

-

2.1

385.2

51.2

-

0.6

22.6

74.4

459.6

£m

43.5

242.0

-

0.9

5.4

291.8

44.9

1.6

1.2

17.7

65.4

357.2

(114.3)

(100.2)

(5.0)

(4.1)

(4.2)

(0.3)

(0.1)

(128.0)

(53.6)

(0.7)

-

(0.1)

(29.3)

(195.2)

(225.3)

(353.3)

106.3

0.2

-

(66.6)

(44.3)

-

(0.3)

217.3

106.3

(5.0)

(4.1)

(1.6)

(0.1)

(0.2)

(111.2)

(45.8)

(0.5)

(1.2)

-

(35.8)

(70.8)

(108.3)

(219.5)

137.7

0.2

0.7

(21.4)

(37.1)

163.8

0.2

31.3

137.7

These financial statements were approved by the Board of Directors on 28 February 2022 and signed on its behalf by:

Murray Legg 
Chairman  
Company Number 03925319
The accompanying notes form an integral part of these financial statements. 

Mike Danson
Chief Executive

78

    ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity

l

a
t
i
p
a
c
e
r
a
h
S

£m

0.2

i

m
u
m
e
r
p
e
r
a
h
S

t
n
u
o
c
c
a

£m

0.7

e
v
r
e
s
e
r
y
r
u
s
a
e
r
T

e
v
r
e
s
e
r
r
e
h
t
O

e
v
r
e
s
e
r
r
e
g
r
e
M

£m

£m

£m

(11.0)

(37.1)

163.8

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

(23.7)

-

13.3

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

s
e
t
o
N

24

23

24

24

18

Balance at 1 January 2020

Profit for the year 

Other comprehensive income:

Net exchange loss on translation of 
foreign entities

Total comprehensive income for the 
year

Transactions with owners:

Share buy-back

Dividends

Vesting of share options

Share-based payments charge

Tax on share-based payments

Balance at 31 December 2020

0.2

0.7

(21.4)

(37.1)

163.8

Profit for the year

Other comprehensive income:

Net exchange loss on translation of 
foreign entities

Total comprehensive income for the 
year

Transactions with owners:

Share buy-back

Dividends

Vesting of share options

Bonus issue of shares

Capital reduction

Share-based payments charge

Tax on share-based payments

Balance at 31 December 2021

-

-

-

-

-

-

171.0

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

(171.0)

(0.7)

-

-

0.2

-

-

-

24

23

24

23

23

24

18

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these financial statements.

-

-

-

(46.5)

-

1.3

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

(7.2)

(163.8)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

(66.6)

(44.3)

e
v
r
e
s
e
r
n
o
i
t
a
s
n
a
r
t

l

y
c
n
e
r
r
u
c
n
g
e
r
o
F

i

£m

0.8

-

t
fi
o
r
p
d
e
n
a
t
e
R

i

£m

34.2

22.6

l

e
b
a
t
u
b
i
r
t
t
a
y
t
i
u
q
E

l

f
o
s
r
e
d
o
h
y
t
i
u
q
e
o
t

t
n
e
r
a
p
e
h
t

£m

151.6

22.6

(0.6)

-

(0.6)

(0.6)

22.6

22.0

-

-

-

-

-

0.2

-

-

(18.0)

(13.3)

4.2

1.6

31.3

24.9

(23.7)

(18.0)

-

4.2

1.6

137.7

24.9

(0.5)

-

(0.5)

(0.5)

24.9

24.4

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

(20.4)

(1.3)

-

171.7

9.2

1.9

(46.5)

(20.4)

-

-

-

9.2

1.9

(0.3)

217.3

106.3

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

79

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows

Continuing operations

Cash flows from operating activities

Profit for the year

Adjustments for:

Depreciation

Amortisation

Gain on disposal of property, plant and equipment

Impairment

Net finance costs

Taxation recognised in profit or loss

Share-based payments charge

(Increase)/decrease in trade and other receivables

Increase in trade and other payables

Revaluation of short- and long-term derivatives

Movement in provisions

Cash generated from operations

Interest paid 

Income taxes paid 

Total cash flows from operating activities

Cash flows from investing activities 

Acquisitions

Cash received from repayment of loans

Proceeds from disposal of property, plant and equipment

Purchase of property, plant and equipment

Purchase of intangible assets

Total cash flows used in investing activities

Cash flows from financing activities 

Repayment of borrowings

Proceeds from borrowings

Loan refinancing fee

Acquisition of own shares

Principal elements of lease payments

Dividends paid

Total cash flows from financing activities

Net increase in cash and cash equivalents 

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year

Effects of currency translation on cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these financial statements.

Year ended
31 December 2021

Year ended
31 December 2020

£m

24.9

6.8

6.5

(0.2)

0.4

5.6

7.7

9.2

(3.2)

2.2

0.9

(0.3)

60.5

(3.4)

(5.1)

52.0

(97.7)

0.9

0.6

(0.8)

(0.5)

(97.5)

(5.0)

129.0

(0.4)

(46.5)

(5.8)

(20.4)

50.9

5.4

17.7

(0.5)

22.6

£m

22.6

7.0

11.8

-

-

4.4

6.0

4.2

1.5

2.5

(0.3)

0.1

59.8

(2.4)

(6.4)

51.0

(1.0)

0.9

-

(3.5)

(1.5)

(5.1)

(5.3)

15.0

(0.7)

(23.7)

(6.1)

(18.0)

(38.8)

7.1

11.2

(0.6)

17.7

80

    ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

1. GENERAL INFORMATION

Nature of operations
The principal activity of GlobalData Plc and its subsidiaries (together ‘the Group’) is to provide business information in the form of high 
quality proprietary data, analytics and insights to clients in multiple sectors. 

GlobalData Plc (‘the Company’) is a company incorporated in the United Kingdom (England & Wales) and listed on the Alternative Investment 
Market  (AIM),  therefore  is  publicly  owned  and  limited  by  shares.  The  registered  office  of  the  Company  is  John  Carpenter  House,  John 
Carpenter Street, London, EC4Y 0AN. The registered number of the Company is 03925319.

Basis of preparation
These financial statements have been prepared in accordance with United Kingdom adopted international accounting standards and in 
conformity with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006 and International Financial Reporting Standards as issued by the IASB.

The financial statements have been prepared on the historical cost basis, except for derivative financial instruments, which are measured 
at fair value. These financial statements have been prepared in accordance with the accounting policies detailed below. The accounting 
policies have been applied consistently throughout the Group.

These financial  statements  are  presented  in  Pounds  Sterling  (£), which  is  also the functional  currency  of the  Company. These financial 
statements have been approved for issue by the Board of Directors.

Critical accounting estimates and judgements
The Group makes estimates and assumptions regarding the future. Estimates and judgements are continually evaluated based on historical 
experience and other factors, including expectations of future events that are believed to be reasonable under the circumstances.

In the future, actual experience may deviate from these estimates and assumptions. The estimates and assumptions that have a significant 
risk of causing a material adjustment to the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities within the next financial year are discussed in detail 
below. 

Key sources of estimation uncertainty
Valuation of acquired intangibles
Management identified and valued acquired intangible assets on acquisitions that were made during the year. Management has applied 
judgements in identifying and valuing intangible assets separate from goodwill that consist of assessing the value of IP rights and databases, 
customer relationships and brands. The Board have a policy of engaging professional advisers on acquisitions with a purchase price greater 
than £10m to advise and assist in calculating intangible asset values. The Group consistently applies the following methodologies for each 
class of identified intangible:
• 
•  Customer relationships – Net present value of future cash flows; and
•  Brands – Royalty relief method.

IP rights and database – Cost to recreate the asset;

Assumptions are made on the useful life of an intangible and if shortened, would increase the amortisation charge recognised in the income 
statement. The identified intangibles are set out in note 13. 

There are a number of assumptions in estimating the present value of future cash flows including management’s expectation of future 
revenue, renewal rates for subscription customers, costs, timing and quantum of future capital expenditure, long-term growth rates and 
discount rates. For both acquisitions made during 2021, the Group has engaged professional advisers to calculate the identified intangibles. 

Carrying value of goodwill and other intangibles
The carrying value of goodwill and other intangibles is assessed annually to ensure that there is no need for impairment. Performing this 
assessment requires management to estimate future cash flows to be generated by the related cash-generating unit, which entails making 
judgements including the expected rate of growth of sales, margins expected to be achieved, the level of future capital expenditure required 
to support these outcomes and the appropriate discount rate to apply when valuing future cash flows. See note 13 for further details on 
intangibles and goodwill.

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

81

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

Management have undertaken sensitivity analysis taking into consideration the impact of key impairment test assumptions arising from 
a range of possible future trading and economic scenarios on each CGU. The following individual scenarios would need to occur before 
impairment is triggered within the Group: 

Data, Analytics & Insights

MEED 

 *percentage points

Revenue Growth  
Falls By* 

Discount Rate  
Rises To 

(13.8%)

(2.1%)

42.2%

11.7%

No  indication  of  impairment  was  noted  from  management’s  review;  there  is  headroom  in  each  CGU.  Management  acknowledge  the 
sensitivity of the assumptions applied to the MEED CGU; however, management are comfortable with these assumptions and will continue 
to monitor performance regularly for any indicators of future impairment loss.  

Critical accounting judgements
Segmental reporting
IFRS8 “Operating Segments” requires the segment information presented in the financial statements to be that which is used internally by 
the chief operating decision maker to evaluate the performance of the business and to decide how to allocate resources. The Group has 
identified the Chief Executive Officer (CEO) as its chief operating decision maker.

The  Group  maintains  a  centralised  operating  model  and  single  product  platform  (One  Platform),  which  is  underpinned  by  a  common 
taxonomy, shared development resource, and new data science technologies. The fundamental principle of the GlobalData business model 
is to provide our clients subscription access to our proprietary data, analytics, and insights platform, with the offering of ancillary services 
such as consulting, single copy reports and events. The vast majority of data sold by the Group is produced by a central research team which 
produces data for the Group as a whole. The team reports to one central individual, the Managing Director of the India operation, who reports 
to the Group CEO. Management have therefore made the judgement that ‘Data, Analytics and Insights’ is the single operating segment of 
the Group. Segmental reporting disclosures are provided in note 4.

The Group profit or loss is reported to the CEO on a monthly basis and consists of earnings before interest, tax, depreciation, amortisation, 
central overheads and other adjusting items (as detailed in note 7). The CEO also monitors revenue within the operating segment.

The Group considers the use of a single operating segment to be appropriate due to:
•  The CEO reviewing profit or loss at the Group level;
•  Utilising a centralised operating model; and
•  Being an integrated solutions based business, rather than a portfolio business.

Identification of Cash-Generating-Units
IAS36  ‘Impairment  of  Assets’  requires  that  assets  be  carried  on  the  statement  of  financial  position  at  no  more  than  their  recoverable 
amount. An asset or cash-generating unit (CGU) is the smallest identifiable group of assets that generates cash inflows and is impaired 
when its carrying amount exceeds its recoverable amount. As at the date of the impairment review (30 September 2021), management 
made the  judgement that the  Group  had two  CGUs,  being  Data, Analytics  &  Insights  and  MEED  (a  subsidiary  based  in the  United Arab 
Emirates).  During  December  2021,  the  Group  acquired  LMC  which  has  been  assessed  to  be  its  own  CGU.  Management  intend  to  fully 
integrate the LMC companies into the Data, Analytics & Insights CGU during 2022. Full disclosure is provided in note 13.

Going concern
The Group meets its day-to-day working capital requirements through free cash flow. Based on cash flow projections the Group considers 
the existing financing facilities to be adequate to meet short-term commitments. 

The finance facilities were issued with debt covenants which are measured on a quarterly basis. There have been no breaches of covenants 
in the year ended 31 December 2021. Management have reviewed forecast cash flows and there is no indication that there will be any breach 
in the next 12 months.

The Directors have a reasonable expectation that there are no material uncertainties that cast significant doubt over the Group’s ability to 
continue in operation and meet its liabilities as they fall due for the foreseeable future, being a period of at least 12 months from the date of 
approval of the financial statements. Accordingly, the Group has prepared the financial statements on a going concern basis.

82

    ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

2. ACCOUNTING POLICIES

a)  Basis of consolidation
The consolidated financial statements include the accounts of the Company and all of its subsidiary undertakings. 
•  Subsidiaries  are those  entities  controlled  by the  Group.  Control  exists when the  Group  is  exposed,  or  has  rights, to variable  returns 
from its involvement with the investee and has the ability to affect those returns through its power over the investee. The financial 
statements of subsidiaries are included in the consolidated financial statements from the date that control commences until the date 
that control ceases.
Intra-group transactions, balances and unrealised gains on transactions between Group companies are eliminated. Where necessary, 
accounting policies of subsidiaries have been changed to ensure consistency with the Group’s accounting policies. 

• 

•  The results and cash flows relating to a business are included in the consolidated income statement and the consolidated statement of 

cash flows from the date of acquisition or are excluded from the date of disposal as appropriate.

b) Business combinations
The Group applies the acquisition method in accounting for business combinations. The consideration transferred by the Group to obtain 
control of a subsidiary is calculated as the sum of the acquisition-date fair values of assets transferred, liabilities incurred and the equity 
interests issued by the Group, which includes the fair value of any asset or liability arising from a contingent consideration arrangement. 
Acquisition costs are expensed as incurred. Assets acquired and liabilities assumed are generally measured at their acquisition-date fair 
values. 

c) Revenue recognition
Revenue is measured at the fair value of consideration received or receivable and comprises amounts derived from services performed by 
the Group during the year in the normal course of business net of discounts, VAT and sales taxes, and provisions for cancellations/credit 
notes.

•  Subscription  income  for  online  services,  data  and  analytics  is  normally  received  at  the  beginning  of  the  services  and  is  therefore 
recognised as a contract liability, “deferred revenue”, in the statement of financial position. Revenue is recognised evenly over the period 
of the contractual term as the performance obligations are satisfied evenly over the term of subscription.

•  Revenue from single copy reports is recognised upon delivery. The client pays for a single static report and the company meets its 

contract obligation at the point in time the report is delivered to the client. 

•  Revenue from the provision of bespoke research services is recognised once contractual performance obligations have been delivered. 
Bespoke projects can have a single or series of different deliverables from reports, presentations or delivery of data workbooks. Revenue 
is recognised as each different contractual obligation within the series is satisfied.
•  Event revenue is recognised when the event is held in line with the contract obligations.
•  Other revenue is recognised in reference to performance obligations as contracted.
• 

In instances where the Group enters into transactions involving a range of the Group’s services, for example a subscription and custom 
research, the total transaction price for a contract is allocated amongst the various performance obligations based on their relative 
stand-alone selling prices.

Where amounts have been invoiced in advance of services performed and the amounts are due, this is included within deferred revenue as 
a contract liability. Similarly, if the Group satisfies a performance obligation before it receives the consideration or is contractually due, the 
Group recognises a contract asset within accrued income in the statement of financial position.

The Group has recognised the incremental costs (for example commission) of obtaining sales contracts as an expense when incurred.

d) Property, plant and equipment
Property,  plant  and  equipment  is  stated  at  historic  cost,  including  any  directly  attributable  costs  of  bringing  the  asset  to  the  location 
and  condition  necessary for  it to  be  capable  of  operating  in the  manner  intended  by  management,  less  accumulated  depreciation  and 
impairment losses.

Depreciation is calculated on a straight-line basis over the estimated useful life of an asset and is applied to the cost less any residual value. 
The asset classes are depreciated over the following periods:

•  Right-of-use assets: shorter of lease term and useful life;
•  Freehold buildings: over 50 years;
•  Fixtures, fittings and equipment: over 3 to 5 years; and
•  Leasehold improvements: over 3 to 10 years.

The useful life, the residual value and the depreciation method are reassessed at each reporting date.

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

83

 
 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

Where there is an indication of impairment, the carrying value of the property, plant and equipment is compared to the higher of value in use 
and the fair value less costs to sell. If the carrying value exceeds the higher of the value in use and fair value less the costs to sell the asset 
then the asset is impaired and its value reduced.

e) Intangible assets
Goodwill
Goodwill is recognised to the extent that it arises through a business combination and represents the difference between the consideration 
transferred and the fair value of net identifiable assets acquired. 

Goodwill  is  stated  at  cost  less  any  accumulated  impairment  losses.  Goodwill  is  allocated  to  appropriate  cash-generating  units  (those 
expected  to  benefit  from  the  business  combination)  and  is  tested  annually  for  impairment.  In  testing  for  impairment,  the  recoverable 
amount of a CGU based on value-in-use calculations is compared to the carrying value of goodwill. These calculations use post-tax cash 
flow projections based on five-year financial budgets approved by management. Cash flows beyond the five-year period are extrapolated 
using estimated long term growth rates. Any impairment losses in respect of goodwill are not reversed.

Acquired intangible assets
Acquired  intangible  assets  include  software,  customer  relationships,  brands  and  intellectual  property  (IP)  rights.  Intangible  assets 
acquired in material business combinations are capitalised at their fair value. The Board have a policy of engaging professional advisers on 
acquisitions with a purchase price greater than £10m to advise and assist in calculating intangible asset values. The Group consistently 
applies the following methodologies when determining the fair value at the date of acquisition for each class of identified intangible:
•  Customer relationships: net present value of future cash flows;
• 
•  Brands: royalty relief method.
Intangible assets are amortised on a straight-line basis over their estimated useful lives of 3 to 15 years for brands, customer relationships 
and  IP  rights.  Amortisation  and  impairment  charges  are  accounted  for  within  the  administrative  costs  category  within  the  income 
statement. Within note 7, the Group separates out amortisation of acquired intangibles from other group amortisation charges.

Intellectual property: cost to recreate the asset; and

Computer software and websites
Non-integral  computer  software  purchases  are  capitalised  at  cost  as  intangible  assets.  The  Group  also  capitalises  development  costs 
associated with new products in accordance with the development criteria prescribed within IAS38 “Intangible Assets”. These costs are 
amortised on a straight-line basis over their estimated useful lives of 3 years. Costs associated with implementing or maintaining computer 
software programs are recognised as an expense. Amortisation and impairment charges are accounted for within the administrative costs 
category within the income statement.

Impairment of intangible assets
Goodwill is not subject to amortisation but is reviewed for impairment annually or whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate 
that the carrying amount may not be recoverable. Intangible assets that are subject to amortisation are reviewed for impairment whenever 
events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying amount may not be recoverable. An impairment loss is recognised for the 
amount by which the asset’s carrying amount exceeds its recoverable amount. The recoverable amount is the higher of an asset’s fair value 
less costs to sell and value in use. For the purposes of assessing impairment, assets are grouped at the lowest levels for which there are 
separately identifiable cash flows (cash-generating units). 

f) Taxation
Tax expense recognised in the income statement for the year comprises the sum of current and deferred tax.  

Current tax is the expected tax payable on the taxable income for the year, using rates substantively enacted at the reporting date, and any 
adjustments to the tax payable in respect of previous years.

Deferred taxation  is  provided  in full  on temporary  differences  between the  carrying  amount  of the  assets  and  liabilities  in the financial 
statements and the tax base. Deferred tax assets are recognised only to the extent that it is probable that future taxable profits will be 
available against which the temporary difference can be utilised. Deferred tax is determined using the tax rates that have been enacted or 
substantially enacted by the reporting date and are expected to apply when the deferred tax liability is settled or the deferred tax asset is 
realised.

Deferred tax is provided on temporary differences arising on investments in subsidiaries except where the timing of the reversal of the 
temporary difference is controlled by the Group and it is probable that the temporary difference will not reverse in the foreseeable future. 
Deferred tax is not provided on temporary differences arising on the initial recognition of goodwill or on assets and liabilities other than in 
a business combination.

84

    ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

Tax is recognised in the income statement, except where it relates to items recognised as other comprehensive income, in which case 
it  is  recognised  in the  statement  of  other  comprehensive  income,  and tax which  related to  items  recognised  in  equity  is  recognised  in 
equity.  Specifically,  and  in  line  with  the  application  of  IAS12  to  share-based  payments,  tax  deductions  (current  or  deferred)  up  to  the 
IFRS2 cumulative remuneration expense are recognised in the income statement as the tax is viewed as linked to the remuneration event.  
However, tax deductions (current or deferred) in excess of the IFRS2 cumulative remuneration expense are recognised in equity as the tax 
is viewed as linked to an equity item.

g) Foreign currencies
The results are presented in Pounds Sterling (£) which is the presentation currency of the Company and Group.

Foreign  currency  transactions  are  translated  into  the  functional  currency  of  the  entity  at  the  rates  of  exchange  ruling  at  the  date  of 
the transaction, and if still in existence at the year end the balance is retranslated at the rates of exchange ruling at the reporting date. 
Differences arising from changes in exchange rates during the year are taken to the income statement.

For the purpose of presenting consolidated financial statements, the assets and liabilities of entities with a functional currency other than 
Sterling are retranslated to Sterling using exchange rates prevailing on the reporting date. Income and expense items and cash flows are 
translated at the average exchange rates for the period and exchange differences arising are recognised in other comprehensive income. 
Such translation differences are recognised in the income statement in the period in which a foreign operation is disposed of.

h) Pensions
The Group contributes to defined contribution pension schemes. Contributions to these schemes are charged to the income statement as 
incurred.

i) Provisions
A provision is recognised in the statement of financial position when the Group has a legal obligation or constructive obligation as a result 
of a past event, it is more likely than not that an outflow of resources will be required to settle that obligation, and a reliable estimate of the 
amount can be made. Provisions are discounted if the time value of money is material. 

j) Leases 
The Group leases offices around the world, plus a small number of motor vehicles. Rental contracts are typically made for fixed periods but 
may have termination options. Lease terms are negotiated on an individual basis and contain a wide range of different terms and conditions. 
The lease arrangements do not impose any covenants, but leased assets may not be used as security for borrowing purposes. 

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

85

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

For any new contracts entered into, the Group considers whether a contract is, or contains a lease. A lease is defined as ‘a contract, or part 
of a contract, that conveys the right to use an asset (the underlying asset) for a period of time in exchange for consideration’. To apply this 
definition the Group assesses whether the contract meets the following criteria:
•  The contract contains an identified asset, which is either explicitly identified in the contract or implicitly specified by being identified at 

the time the asset is made available to the Group;

•  The Group has the right to obtain substantially all of the economic benefits from use of the identified asset throughout the period of use, 

considering its rights within the defined scope of the contract; and

•  The Group has the right to direct the use of the identified asset throughout the period of use. 

At the lease commencement date, the Group recognises the lease as a right-of-use asset and a corresponding liability on the statement of 
financial position. The right-of-use assets have been included in property, plant and equipment. 

The right-of-use asset is measured at cost, which is made up of the initial measurement of the lease liability, any initial direct costs incurred 
by the Group, an estimate of any costs to dismantle and remove the asset at the end of the lease and any lease payments made in advance 
of the lease commencement date (net of any incentives received).  

The Group depreciates the right-of-use assets on a straight-line basis from the lease commencement date to the earlier of the end of the 
useful life of the right-of-use asset or the end of the lease term. The Group also assesses the right-of-use asset for impairment when such 
indicators exist. 

At the commencement date, the Group measures the lease liability at the present value of the lease payments unpaid at that date, discounted 
using the interest rate implicit in the lease if that rate is readily available, or the lease specific incremental borrowing rate. Subsequent to 
initial measurement, the liability will be reduced for payments made and increased for interest. Each lease payment is allocated between 
the  liability  and  finance  cost.  The  finance  cost  is  charged  to  the  income  statement  over  the  lease  period  so  as  to  produce  a  constant 
periodic rate of interest on the remaining balance of the liability for each period. The liability is remeasured to reflect any reassessment 
or modification, or if there are changes in in-substance fixed payments. When the liability is remeasured, the corresponding adjustment is 
reflected in the right-of-use asset, or the income statement if the right-of-use asset is already reduced to zero. 

Termination options are included in a number of property leases across the Group. These options are used to maximise operational flexibility 
in terms of managing contracts. In determining the lease term, management considers all facts and circumstances that create an economic 
incentive to exercise a termination option. Periods after termination options are only included in the lease term if the termination option is 
reasonably certain not to be exercised.    

The Group has elected to account for short term leases and leases of low-value assets using the practical expedients. Payments associated 
with short term leases and leases of low-value assets are recognised on a straight-line basis as an expense in the income statement. Short 
term leases are leases with a term of 12 months or less. Low-value assets comprise IT and copying equipment with a value of less than 
£5,000. 

The Group sub-leases a number of properties in the UK. However, all of the risks and rewards of ownership have not been transferred to the 
lessee and therefore the Group recognises the head lease asset as a right-of-use asset and recognises the rental income on the sub-lease 
operating lease contracts as other income. 

k) Financial instruments 
The Group has derivative and non-derivative financial instruments which comprise foreign currency contracts, receivables, cash, loans and 
borrowings and trade payables.

Recognition and derecognition
Financial  assets  and  financial  liabilities  are  recognised  when  the  Group  becomes  a  party  to  the  contractual  provisions  of  the  financial 
instrument.  Financial  assets  are  derecognised  when  the  contractual  rights  to  the  cash  flows  from  the  financial  asset  expire,  or  when 
the financial asset and substantially all the risks and rewards are transferred. A financial liability is derecognised when it is extinguished, 
discharged, cancelled or expires.

Classification and initial measurement of financial assets
Except for those trade  receivables that  do  not  contain  a  significant financing  component  and  are  measured  at the transaction  price  in 
accordance with IFRS15, all financial assets are initially measured at fair value adjusted for transaction costs (where applicable).

86

    ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

In the periods presented, all of the Group’s non-derivative financial assets are classified as at amortised cost. Financial assets are measured 
at amortised cost if the assets meet the following conditions:
• 
• 

they are held within a business model whose objective is to hold the financial assets and collect its contractual cash flows; and
the contractual terms of the financial assets give rise to cash flows that are solely payments of principal and interest on the principal 
amount outstanding.

After  initial  recognition,  these  are  measured  at  amortised  cost  using  the  effective  interest  method.  Discounting  is  omitted  where  the 
effect of discounting is immaterial. The Group’s cash and cash equivalents, trade and other receivables fall into this category of financial 
instruments.

Classification and initial measurement of financial liabilities
Financial liabilities are initially measured at fair value, and, where applicable, adjusted for transaction costs unless the Group designated a 
financial liability at fair value through profit or loss.

Cash
Cash comprises cash balances and highly liquid call deposits. Bank overdrafts that form an integral part of the Group’s cash management 
are included as a component of cash for the purpose of the statement of cash flows.

Derivative financial instruments
The Group uses derivative financial instruments to reduce its exposure to fluctuations in foreign currency exchange rates. Derivatives are 
measured at fair values and any movement in fair value is recognised in the income statement.

Impairment of trade receivables
The Group recognises lifetime expected credit losses (ECL) for trade receivables. The ECLs on these financial assets are estimated using 
a provision matrix based on the Group’s historical credit loss experience, adjusted for factors that are specific to the receivables, general 
economic conditions and an assessment of both the current as well as the forecast direction of conditions at the reporting date. Additionally, 
as part of the IFRS9 model being used, the Group recognises some provisions at 100% of the receivable balance based on the age of the 
relevant receivables, external evidence of the credit status of the customer entity and the status of any disputed amounts. The carrying 
amount is reduced by the ECL through the use of a provision account. When a trade receivable is considered uncollectible, it is written 
off  against the  provision  account.  Subsequent  recoveries  of  amounts  previously written  off  are  credited  against the  provision  account. 
Changes in the carrying amount of the provision are recognised in the consolidated income statement.

Trade and other payables
Trade and other payables are initially measured at fair value, and are subsequently measured at amortised cost, using the effective interest 
method.

l) Borrowings and borrowing costs 
Borrowings  are  recognised  initially  at  fair value,  net  of  transaction  costs  incurred,  and  subsequently  at  amortised  cost. Any  difference 
between the proceeds (net of transaction costs) and the redemption value is recognised in the income statement over the period of the 
borrowings using the effective interest method. 

Borrowings are classified as current liabilities unless the Group has an unconditional right to defer settlement of the liability for at least 12 
months from the reporting date. 

Borrowing costs, being interest, and other costs incurred in connection with the servicing of borrowings, are recognised as an expense 
when incurred. 

m) Share-based payments
The Group operates two share-based compensation plans under which the entity receives services from employees as consideration for 
equity instruments (options) of the Group. The fair value of the employee services received in exchange for the grant of the options and 
awards is recognised as an expense in the income statement. The total amount to be expensed is determined by reference to the fair value 
of the options granted (fair value at the date of grant determined using the Black-Scholes model for Scheme 1 and the Monte Carlo method 
for Scheme 2), excluding the impact of any non-market service and performance vesting conditions (for example, profitability, sales growth 
targets and remaining an employee of the entity over a specified time period). Non-market vesting conditions are included in assumptions 
about the number of options and awards that are expected to vest. The total amount expensed is recognised over the vesting period, which 
is the period over which all of the specified existing conditions are to be satisfied. At each reporting date, the entity revises its estimates 
of the number of options and awards that are expected to vest based on the non-market vesting conditions. It recognises the impact of 
the revision to original estimates, if any, in the income statement, with a corresponding adjustment to the share-based payments reserve 
within equity.

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

87

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

n) Dividends
Dividends on the Group’s ordinary shares are recognised as a liability in the Group’s financial statements, and as a deduction from equity, in 
the period in which the dividends are declared. Where such dividends are proposed subject to the approval of the Group’s shareholders, the 
dividends are only declared once shareholder approval has been obtained.

o) Equity
Share capital is determined using the nominal value of shares that have been issued. Premiums received on the initial issuing of share capital 
are credited to share premium account. Any transaction costs associated with the issuing of shares are deducted from share premium, net 
of any related income tax benefits.

Retained earnings includes all current and prior period results as disclosed in the income statement.

p) Employee Benefit Trust 
The  assets  and  liabilities  of  the  Employee  Benefit  Trust  have  been  included  in  the  Group’s  financial  statements  because  the  Employee 
Benefit Trust is controlled by the Group. 

The cost of purchasing own shares held by the Employee Benefit Trust is shown as a deduction in arriving at total shareholders’ equity.

q) Other income  
Other income represents rental income on sub-lease property contracts and research & development tax credits. 

r) Presentation of non-statutory alternative performance measures
The  Directors  believe that Adjusted  EBITDA, Adjusted  EBITDA  margin, Adjusted  profit  before tax, Adjusted  profit  after tax  and Adjusted 
earnings per share provide additional useful information on the core operational performance of the Group to shareholders, and we review 
the results of the Group using these measures internally. The term ‘adjusted’ is not a defined term under IFRS and may not therefore be 
comparable with similarly titled profit measures reported by other companies. It is not intended to be a substitute for, or superior to, IFRS 
measures of profit. 

Adjustments are made in respect of:

Share-based payments

Restructuring, M&A and refinancing costs

Amortisation and impairment of acquired 
intangible assets

Revaluation of short- and long-term 
derivatives

Unrealised operating foreign exchange 
gain/loss 

Share-based payment expenses are excluded from Adjusted EBITDA as they are a 
non-cash charge, the awards are equity-settled and the Directors believe they result 
in a level of charge that would distort the user’s view of the core trading performance 

The Group considers these items of expense as exceptional and excludes them from 
Adjusted EBITDA where the nature of the item, or its size, is not related to the core 
underlying trading of the Group. This is to assist the user of the financial statements 
to better understand the results of the core operations of the Group and allow 
comparability of underlying results.

The amortisation charge for those intangible assets recognised on business 
combinations is excluded from Adjusted EBITDA since they are non-cash charges 
arising from historical investment activities. Any impairment charges recognised 
in relation to these intangible assets are also excluded from Adjusted EBITDA. This 
is a common adjustment made by acquisitive information service businesses and 
therefore consistent with peers.   

Gains and losses are recognised within Adjusted EBITDA when they are realised in 
cash terms and therefore we exclude non-cash movements arising from fluctuations 
in exchange rate as these may not reflect the underlying performance of the Group, 
which better aligns Adjusted EBITDA with the cash performance of the business.

88

    ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

3.  NEW OR REVISED STANDARDS OR INTERPRETATIONS

This report has been prepared based on the accounting policies detailed in the Group’s financial statements for the year ended 31 December 
2021 and is consistent with the policies applied in the previous year, except for the following new standards. The new standards which are 
effective during the year (and have had a minimal impact on the financial statements) are:
•  Amendments to IFRS16: COVID-19 related Rent Concessions (effective for periods on or after 1 June 2020); and
•  Amendments to IFRS9, IAS39, IFRS7, IFRS4 and IFRS16: Interest Rate Benchmark Reform – Phase 2 (effective for periods on or after 1 

January 2021).

International Financial Reporting Standards (“standards”) in issue but not yet effective 
The Group has not applied the following new and revised IFRSs that have been issued but are not yet effective: 

•  Amendments to IFRS16: COVID-19 related Rent Concessions beyond 30 June 2021 (effective for periods on or after 1 April 2021)

The above standard is not yet effective and therefore has not been applied in the financial statements. It is anticipated that there will be 
minimal impact on the financial statements from the adoption of this revised standard.

4. SEGMENTAL ANALYSIS

The principal activity of GlobalData Plc and its subsidiaries (together ‘the Group’) is to provide business information in the form of high 
quality proprietary data, analytics and insights to clients in multiple sectors. 

IFRS8 “Operating Segments” requires the segment information presented in the financial statements to be that which is used internally by 
the chief operating decision maker to evaluate the performance of the business and to decide how to allocate resources. The Group has 
identified the Chief Executive Officer (CEO) as its chief operating decision maker.

The  Group  maintains  a  centralised  operating  model  and  single  product  platform  (One  Platform),  which  is  underpinned  by  a  common 
taxonomy, shared development resource, and new data science technologies. The fundamental principle of the GlobalData business model 
is to provide our clients subscription access to our proprietary data, analytics, and insights platform, with the offering of ancillary services 
such as consulting, single copy reports and events. The vast majority of data sold by the Group is produced by a central research team which 
produces data for the Group as a whole. The team reports to one central individual, the Managing Director of the India operation, who reports 
to the Group CEO. ‘Data, Analytics and Insights’ is therefore considered to be the operating segment of the Group. 

The Group profit or loss is reported to the Chief Executive Officer on a monthly basis and consists of earnings before interest, tax, depreciation, 
amortisation, central overheads and other adjusting items. The Chief Executive Officer also monitors revenue within the operating segment.

The Group considers the use of a single operating segment to be appropriate due to:
•  The CEO reviewing profit or loss at the Group level;
•  Utilising a centralised operating model; and
•  Being an integrated solutions based business, rather than a portfolio business.

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

89

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

A reconciliation of Adjusted EBITDA to profit before tax from continuing operations is set out below:

Adjusted EBITDA

Restructuring costs 

M&A costs 

Refinancing costs 

Share-based payment charge  

Revaluation loss/(gain) on short- and long-term derivatives 

Unrealised operating foreign exchange gains 

Amortisation of acquired intangibles 

Depreciation

Amortisation (excluding amortisation of acquired intangible assets)

Finance costs 

Profit before tax

Year ended
31 December 2021
£m
64.4

Year ended
31 December 2020
£m
56.7

(1.2)

(2.4)

(0.2)

(9.2)

(0.9)

1.0

(5.6)

(6.8)

(0.9)

(5.6)

32.6

(0.4)

(0.7)

(0.2)

(4.2)

0.3

0.3

(10.7)

(7.0)

(1.1)

(4.4)

28.6

Geographical analysis
Our primary geographical markets are serviced by our global sales teams which are organised as Europe, US and Asia Pacific by virtue of the 
team location. The below disaggregated revenue is derived from the geographical location of our customers rather than the team structure 
the Group is organised by.

From continuing operations

Year ended 31 December 2021

Revenue from external customers

Year ended 31 December 2020

Revenue from external customers

UK

£m

27.8

UK

£m

26.3

Europe

Americas1

Asia Pacific

MENA2

Rest of World

£m

51.8

£m

67.8

£m

21.0

£m

13.9

£m

7.0

Europe

Americas1

Asia Pacific

MENA2

Rest of World

£m

49.7

£m

62.8

£m

19.2

£m

13.1

£m

7.3

Total

£m

189.3

Total

£m

178.4

1. Americas includes revenue from the United States of America of £65.7m (2020: £59.7m)

2. Middle East & North Africa

Intangible assets held in the US and Canada were £34.3m (2020: £21.1m), of which £29.1m related to goodwill (2020: £19.7m). Intangible 
assets held in the UAE were £13.6m (2020: £14.3m) of which £11.4m related to goodwill (2020: £11.4m). All other non-current assets are held 
in the UK. The largest customer represented less than 3% of the Group’s consolidated revenue. 

90

    ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

5. REVENUE

The Group generates revenue from services provided over a period of time such as recurring subscriptions and other services which are 
deliverable at a point in time such as reports, events and custom research. 

Subscription income for online services, data and analytics (typically 12 months) is normally received at the beginning of the services and is 
therefore recognised as a contract liability, “deferred revenue”, in the statement of financial position. Revenue is recognised evenly over the 
period of the contractual term as the performance obligations are satisfied evenly over the term of subscription.

The revenue on services delivered at a point in time is recognised when our contractual obligation is satisfied, such as delivery of a static 
report  or  delivery  of  an  event.  The  obligation  on  these  types  of  contracts  is  a  discrete  obligation,  which  once  met  satisfies  the  Group 
performance obligation under the terms of the contract.

Any  invoiced  contracted  amounts  which  are  still  subject  to  performance  obligations  and  where  the  payment  has  been  received  or 
is  contractually  due  are  recognised  within  deferred  revenue  at  the  statement  of  financial  position  date.  Typically,  the  Group  receives 
settlement of cash at the start of each contract and standard terms are zero days. Similarly, if the Group satisfies a performance obligation 
before it receives the consideration or is contractually due the Group recognises a contract asset within accrued income in the statement 
of financial position.

Revenue recognised in the 
Consolidated Income Statement

Deferred Revenue recognised within the 
Consolidated Statement of Financial 
Position

Year ended 31 
December 2021

Year ended 31 
December 2020

As at 31  
December 2021

As at 31  
December 2020

£m

156.9

32.4

189.3

£m

149.1

29.3

178.4

£m

73.1

8.3

81.4

£m

64.2

10.5

74.7

Services transferred:

   Over a period of time

   Immediately on delivery

Total

As  subscriptions  are typically for  periods  of  12  months the  majority  of  deferred  revenue  held  at  31  December will  be  recognised  in the 
income statement in the following year. As at 31 December 2021 £0.4m (2020: £0.6m) of the deferred revenue balance will be recognised 
beyond the next 12 months. In the year ended 31 December 2021 the Group recognised revenue of £74.1m (2020: £67.5m) that was included 
in the deferred revenue balance at the beginning of the period.   

In instances where the Group enters into transactions involving a range of the Group’s services, for example a subscription and custom 
research, the total transaction price for a contract is allocated amongst the various performance obligations based on their relative stand-
alone selling prices.

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

91

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

6. OPERATING PROFIT

Operating profit is stated after the following expenses relating to continuing operations:

Cost of sales

Administrative costs

Losses on trade receivables

Total operating expenses

Included within other administrative costs are the following expenses:

Depreciation of property, plant and equipment

Amortisation of intangible assets

Gain (including realised and unrealised) on foreign exchange

Short-term and low-value lease expenses

Auditor’s remuneration

Auditor’s remuneration:

Audit of the Company’s and the consolidated financial statements

Audit of the subsidiary companies’ financial statements

Total auditor’s remuneration

Year ended 
31 December 2021

Year ended 
31 December 2020

£m

101.8

49.0

150.8

1.2

152.0

£m

101.0

44.4

145.4

1.3

146.7

Year ended 31  
December 2021

Year ended 31  
December 2020

£m
6.8

6.5

(0.9)

-

0.9

£m
7.0

11.8

(0.3)

0.7

0.8

Year ended 31  
December 2021

Year ended 31  
December 2020

£m

0.4

0.5

0.9

£m

0.4

0.4

0.8

92

    ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

7. ADJUSTING ITEMS 

Restructuring costs

M&A costs

Refinancing costs

Share-based payment charge 

Revaluation loss/(gain) on short- and long-term derivatives

Unrealised operating foreign exchange gains

Amortisation of acquired intangibles

Total adjusting items

The adjustments made are as follows:

Year ended 31  
December 2021

Year ended 31 
December 2020

£m
1.2

2.4

0.2

9.2

0.9

(1.0)

5.6

18.5

£m
0.4

0.7

0.2

4.2

(0.3)

(0.3)

10.7

15.6

•  Restructuring relates to redundancy payments, professional fees and impairment charges incurred in relation to group reorganisation 

projects.

•  The  M&A  costs  consist  of  professional  fees  incurred  in  both  performing  due  diligence  relating  to  potential  acquisition  targets  and 

performing completion activities in relation to acquisitions made during the year.

•  The share-based payments charge is in relation to the share-based compensation plans (detailed in note 24) under which the entity 
receives services from employees as consideration for equity instruments (options) of the Group. The fair value of the employee services 
received in exchange for the grant of the options and awards is recognised as an expense in the income statement. The total amount 
to be expensed is determined by reference to the fair value of the options granted (fair value at the date of grant determined using 
the Black-Scholes model for Scheme 1 and the Monte Carlo method for Scheme 2), excluding the impact of any non-market service 
and performance vesting conditions (for example, profitability, sales growth targets and remaining an employee of the entity over a 
specified time period). 

•  The  revaluation  of  short-  and  long-term  derivatives  relates  to  movement  in  the  fair  value  of  the  short-  and  long-term  derivatives 

detailed in note 16.

•  Unrealised operating foreign exchange gains relate to non-cash exchange gains made on operating items.
•  Refinancing costs consist of legal fees incurred in relation to amendments made to the facilities agreement during the year.

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

93

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

8. PARTICULARS OF EMPLOYEES 

Employee benefit expense

From continuing operations

Wages and salaries

Social security costs

Pension costs

Share-based payments charge (note 24)

Year ended 31  
December 2021

Year ended 31 
December 2020

£m
95.9

6.7

1.7

9.2

113.5

£m
91.5

6.6

1.6

4.2

103.9

Termination costs incurred during the year amounted to £0.3m (2020: £0.4m).

Pension costs represents payments made into defined contribution schemes.

Number of employees

The average monthly number of persons, including Executive Directors, employed by the Group during the year was as follows:

Researchers and analysts

Sales and admin 

There were no persons employed by the Company during the year (2020: nil).

9. KEY MANAGEMENT COMPENSATION

Year ended 31  
December 2021 

Year ended 31 
December 2020

No.

2,914

676

3,590

No.

2,640

743

3,383

Key management is defined as Directors plus all members of the Group’s Executive Management Committee. In the year ended 31 
December 2021, key management consisted of 19 employees (2020: 17 employees). 

Short-term employee benefits

Post-employment benefits

Share-based payments

Year ended 31 
December 2021

Year ended 31 
December 2020

£m
3.1

0.1

2.4

5.6

£m
3.0

0.1

1.4

4.5

Post-employment benefits are comprised of payments made into the employee’s defined contribution pension schemes.

Information regarding Directors’ remuneration, share options and bonuses are set out in the Directors’ Remuneration Report on pages 
55-61.

94

    ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

10. NET FINANCE COSTS

Loan interest cost

Lease interest cost

Other interest cost

Other interest income 

11. INCOME TAX

Income statement

Current income tax:

Current income tax

Adjustments in respect of prior years

Deferred income tax:

Relating to origination and reversal of temporary differences

Effect of change in tax rates

Adjustments in respect of deferred tax of previous years

Movement in unrecognised deferred tax

Total income tax expense in income statement

Recognised in statement of changes in equity

Corporation tax income on share options exercised

Deferred tax income on share-based payments

Total tax income recognised directly in equity

Year ended 31  
December 2021

Year ended 31 
December 2020

£m
4.0

1.5

0.1

-

5.6

£m
2.8

1.7

-

(0.1)

4.4

Year ended 31  
December 2021

Year ended 31 
December 2020

£m

(10.7)

0.6

(10.1)

2.4

(0.6)

-

0.6

2.4

(7.7)

£m

(6.7)

0.4

(6.3)

(1.1)

0.1

(0.1)

1.4

0.3

(6.0)

Year ended 31 
December 2021

Year ended 31 
December 2020

£m

0.4

1.5

1.9

£m

1.3

0.3

1.6

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

95

 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

The tax charge is reconciled to the standard corporation tax rate applicable in the UK as follows:

Profit before tax

Tax at the UK corporation tax rate of 19% (2020: 19%)

Effects of:

Non-taxable income for tax purposes

Non-deductible expenses for tax purposes

Movement in share-based payments

Deferred tax on unremitted earnings in the Group’s subsidiaries

Effect of tax rates in overseas jurisdictions

Overseas tax

Effect of change in deferred tax rates

Adjustments in respect of current income tax of previous years

Movement in unrecognised deferred tax

12. EARNINGS PER SHARE

Year ended 31  
December 2021

Year ended 31 
December 2020

£m
32.6

(6.2)

0.2

(1.0)

-

-

(1.0)

(0.3)

(0.6)

0.6

0.6

(7.7)

£m
28.6

(5.4)

0.1

(0.7)

0.2

(1.1)

(0.9)

-

0.1

0.3

1.4

(6.0)

The calculation of the basic earnings per share is based on the earnings attributable to ordinary shareholders of the parent company 
divided by the weighted average number of shares in issue during the period. The Group also has a share options scheme in place and 
therefore the Group has calculated the dilutive effect of these options. 

Earnings per share attributable to equity holders from continuing operations:

Basic

Profit for the period attributable to ordinary shareholders of the parent company (£m)

Weighted average number of shares (no’ m)

Basic earnings per share (pence)

Diluted

Profit for the period attributable to ordinary shareholders of the parent company (£m)

Weighted average number of shares (no’ m)

Diluted earnings per share (pence)

Year ended 31 
December 2021

Year ended 31 
December 2020

24.9

113.5

21.9

24.9

123.0

20.2

22.6

116.2

19.4

22.6

124.8

18.1

Reconciliation of basic weighted average number of shares to the diluted weighted average number of shares:

Basic weighted average number of shares, net of shares held in 
Treasury reserve

Share options in issue at end of period, net of shares not paid up

Diluted weighted average number of shares

Year ended 31 
December 2021
No’ m

Year ended 31 
December 2020
No’ m

113.5

9.5

123.0

116.2

8.6

124.8

96

    ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

13. INTANGIBLE ASSETS

Cost

As at 1 January 2020

Additions: Business combinations

Additions: Separately acquired

Foreign currency retranslation

As at 31 December 2020

Additions: Business combinations

Additions: Separately acquired

Reclassification to PPE

Fair value adjustment

As at 31 December 2021

Amortisation

As at 1 January 2020

Charge for the year

As at 31 December 2020

Additions: Business combinations

Impairment

Charge for the year

Reclassification to PPE

As at 31 December 2021

Net book value

As at 31 December 2021

As at 31 December 2020

Software

Customer 
relationships

Brands IP rights and 
Database

Goodwill

Total 

£m

10.7

-

1.5

-

12.2

0.7

0.4

(0.5)

-

12.8

(8.8)

(1.1)

(9.9)

(0.5)

-

(0.9)

0.3

(11.0)

£m

43.6

0.4

-

-

44.0

11.8

-

-

-

£m

16.0

-

-

0.1

16.1

0.1

-

-

-

£m

48.9

1.3

-

-

50.2

25.2

0.1

-

-

55.8

16.2

75.5

(25.1)

(3.7)

(28.8)

-

-

(3.8)

-

(32.6)

(9.6)

(1.1)

(10.7)

-

-

(0.6)

-

(11.3)

(42.4)

(5.9)

(48.3)

-

-

(1.2)

-

(49.5)

£m

£m

227.3

0.4

-

-

227.7

75.4

-

-

(0.4)

302.7

(10.5)

-

(10.5)

-

(0.4)

-

-

346.5

2.1

1.5

0.1

350.2

113.2

0.5

(0.5)

(0.4)

463.0

(96.4)

(11.8)

(108.2)

(0.5)

(0.4)

(6.5)

0.3

(10.9)

(115.3)

1.8

2.3

23.2

15.2

4.9

5.4

26.0

1.9

291.8

217.2

347.7

242.0

Additions as a result of business combinations in the year have been disclosed in further detail in note 27.

The  Group  has  not  capitalised  any  internally  generated  intangible  assets  (2020:  £nil).  As  at  31  December  2021,  the  net  book  value  of 
internally generated intangible assets is £nil (2020: £nil).

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

97

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

As  at  31  December  2021, the  carrying value  and  remaining  amortisation  period  of the  significant  customer  relationships,  brands  and  IP 
rights and database assets were as follows:

Customer 
relationships

Brands

IP rights  
and Database

Carrying value

Remaining 
amortisation

Carrying  
value

Remaining 
amortisation 

Carrying  
value

Remaining 
amortisation  

Period

1 year

4 years

3 years

7 years

2-9 years

1 year

12 years

-

-

6 years

10 years

2-12 years

£m

0.2

0.9

2.1

0.7

5.6

1.6

0.2

-

-

0.3

4.2

7.4

23.2

£m

Period

£m

Period

-

-

-

-

-

3.4

-

1.4

-

-

-

0.1

4.9

-

-

-

-

-

9 years

-

6 years

-

-

-

2 years

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

0.1

0.9

9.9

15.1

26.0

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

3 years

3 years

11 years

10 years

Current Analysis

Infinata

MEED

AROQ

Research Views

GlobalData

Global Ad Source

Verdict

IM EM Databases*

Progressive Content

Life Sciences

LMC

Total carrying value

*Investmentmonitor and Energymonitor as disclosed in note 28.

Impairment tests for goodwill and intangible assets

Goodwill and intangibles are allocated to the cash-generating unit (CGU) that is expected to benefit from the use of the asset. 

The  Group  tests  goodwill  and  intangible  assets  as  at  30  September  each  year  for  impairment  and  whenever  events  or  changes  in 
circumstances indicate that the carrying value may not be recoverable. The recoverable amount of a CGU is determined based on value in 
use calculations. These calculations use post-tax cash flow projections based on the next financial year’s budget with growth rates applied 
to generate a 5-year forecast. Cash flows beyond the 5-year period are extrapolated using estimated long term growth rates.

The Group operates within a single operating segment, being ‘Data, Analytics and Insights’. However, in accordance with IAS36, Impairment 
of Assets, the Group has to consider impairment indicators for goodwill and intangible assets on the value of the CGUs. A CGU is defined 
as the smallest identifiable group of assets that generates cash inflows that are largely independent of the cash inflows from other assets 
or groups of assets. Management are of the opinion that since acquisition and through being integrated and further developed within the 
Group, the acquired intangible assets of the Group all contribute to generating cash inflows for the wider business, covering all subject 
matter areas. All subject matters are accessible through the single operating platform (One Platform), and all products include access to a 
thin layer of information spanning across all markets and subjects. The exception to this is MEED, which is classified as an individual CGU 
due to having separately identifiable cash flows and financial results. Management therefore identified that as at the date of impairment 
review (30 September), the Group had 2 CGUs, being ‘Data, Analytics and Insights’ and MEED. Management recognise that this approach is 
different to the conclusion reached regarding the segmental reporting rationale of the Group; however, this is appropriate because the IFRS 
criteria for identifying segments and CGUs differ. Management have considered whether events should be classified as a separate CGU but 
have concluded that this is a route to market with the same underlying Data, Analytics and Insights product. 

As noted in note 27, on 15 December the Group made the LMC acquisition, which constitutes its own CGU. It is management’s intention to 
fully integrate the LMC companies into the Data, Analytics and Insights CGU during 2022. No indicators of impairment have been noted on 
the valuation of the assets acquired (valued on an EBITDA multiple basis) between the date of acquisition and 31 December 2021.

Overall,  within  the  impairment  review  performed  as  at  30  September  2021,  the  Group  had  significant  headroom  on  its  goodwill  and 
intangibles carrying value, with the Data, Analytics and Insights CGU having headroom of £1,430.4m and the MEED CGU having headroom 
of £11.8m. 

98

    ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

Assumptions
The recoverable amounts of the CGUs are determined from value in use calculations, which are based on the cash flow projections for each 
CGU. Value in use projections are based on Board approved revenue and cost budgets for 2022, with revenue and cost increases to cover 
the  period  2023-2026.  Revenue  growth  rates  are  based  on  5 forecast year  CAGR which  are  based  upon  management’s  expectation  of 
performance over this period. These rates are comparable with or lower than historic growth performance. Cost increases are based upon 
the OECD long term forecast. 

The discount rate is derived by calculating weighted average costs of equity and debt. The rate reflects appropriate adjustments relating 
to market risk and risk factors of each CGU.   

For  the  Data,  Analytics  and  Insights  CGU,  a  terminal  value  calculation  has  been  determined  post  2026  using  a  growth  rate  of  2%  in 
accordance  with  the  OECD  long  term  forecast.  Management  are  of  the  view  that  the  MEED  CGU  has  similar  long  term  prospects  and 
opportunities for growth as the Data, Analytics and Insights CGU and would expect the terminal growth rate to be consistent with the OECD 
long term forecast of 2%.

The key assumptions are set out below: 

Increase in revenue  
(for years 1 to 5) 

Increase in costs  
(for years 1 to 5) 

Pre-tax discount rate 

Terminal growth rate 

2021

2020

2021

2020

2021

2020

2021

2020

Data, Analytics & 
Insights

7.00%

 5.67%

2.00% 

2.00% 

8.52%

 9.80%

2.00%

2.00% 

MEED 

1.39%

 2.98%

2.00% 

2.00% 

7.49%

 9.08%

2.00%

2.00% 

Management  has  undertaken  sensitivity  analysis taking  into  consideration the  impact  of  key  impairment test  assumptions  arising from 
a range of possible future trading and economic scenarios on each CGU. The following individual scenarios would need to occur before 
impairment is triggered within the Group: 

Data, Analytics & Insights

MEED 

*percentage points

Revenue growth  
falls by* 

Discount rate  
rises to 

(13.8%)

(2.1%)

42.2%

11.7%

No  indication  of  impairment  was  noted  from  management’s  review,  there  is  headroom  in  each  CGU.  Management  acknowledge  the 
sensitivity of the assumptions applied to the MEED CGU however management are comfortable with these assumptions and will continue 
to monitor performance regularly for any indicators of future impairment loss.  

Amortisation
Amortisation and impairment charges are accounted for within the administrative costs category within the income statement. Within note 
7, the Group separates out amortisation of acquired intangibles from other group amortisation charges.

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

99

 
 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

14. PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT

Buildings Fixtures, fittings  
& equipment

Leasehold 
improvements

Cost

As at 1 January 2020

Additions: Business combinations

Additions: Separately acquired

Foreign currency retranslation

Disposals

As at 31 December 2020

Additions: Business combinations

Additions: Separately acquired

Reclassification from intangibles

Foreign currency retranslation

Disposals

As at 31 December 2021

Depreciation

As at 1 January 2020

Additions: Business combinations

Charge for the year 

Foreign currency retranslation

Disposals

As at 31 December 2020

Additions: Business combinations

Charge for the year 

Reclassification from intangibles

Foreign currency retranslation

Disposals

As at 31 December 2021

Net book value

As at 31 December 2021

As at 31 December 2020

£m

49.2

-

0.3

(0.5)

(0.9)

48.1

-

2.5

-

-

(7.4)

43.2

(4.0)

-

(5.7)

0.1

0.6

(9.0)

-

(5.0)

-

-

2.5

(11.5)

31.7

39.1

£m

7.8

0.2

2.8

(0.1)

(0.1)

10.6

0.5

0.7

0.5

-

(4.5)

7.8

(6.4)

(0.2)

(1.2)

0.1

0.1

(7.6)

(0.5)

(1.6)

(0.3)

-

4.5

(5.5)

2.3

3.0

£m

1.0

-

0.7

-

-

1.7

-

0.1

-

-

-

1.8

(0.2)

-

(0.1)

-

-

(0.3)

-

(0.2)

-

-

-

(0.5)

1.3

1.4

Total

£m

58.0

0.2

3.8

(0.6)

(1.0)

60.4

0.5

3.3

0.5

-

(11.9)

52.8

(10.6)

(0.2)

(7.0)

0.2

0.7

(16.9)

(0.5)

(6.8)

(0.3)

-

7.0

(17.5)

35.3

43.5

100

 ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

Included in the net carrying amount of property, plant and equipment as at 31 December 2021 are right-of-use assets as follows:

Cost

As at 31 December 2020

Additions: Separately acquired

Disposals

As at 31 December 2021

Depreciation

As at 31 December 2020

Charge for the year

Disposals

As at 31 December 2021

Net book value

As at 31 December 2021

As at 31 December 2020

15. LEASES 

Buildings

£m

47.6

2.5

(6.9)

43.2

(8.9)

(5.0)

2.4

(11.5)

31.7

38.7

The Group has leases for office buildings and motor vehicles. With the exception of short-term leases and leases of low-value underlying 
assets, each lease is reflected in the statement of financial position as a right-of-use asset and a lease liability. The Group classifies its 
right-of-use assets in a consistent manner to its property, plant and equipment (see note 14). 

Lease liabilities are presented in the statement of financial position as follows:

Current lease liabilities

Non-current lease liabilities

31 December 2021

31 December 2020

£m

4.1

29.3

33.4

£m

               4.1 

             35.8 

             39.9 

The table below describes the nature of the Group’s leasing activities by type of right-of-use asset recognised in the statement of financial 
position:

Office buildings

Motor vehicles

No. of right-
of-use assets 
leased

28

1

Range of 
remaining  
term

0-12 years

1-2 years

Average 
remaining  
lease term

No. of leases 
with extension 
options

3.2 years

1.4 years

-

-

No. of 
leases with 
termination 
options

2

-

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

101

 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

The lease liabilities are secured by the related underlying assets. Future minimum lease payments at 31 December 2021 were as follows:

As at 31 December 2021

Lease payments

Finance charges

Net present values

As at 31 December 2020

Lease payments

Finance charges

Net present values

Within one 
year

One to  
five years 

After  
five years

£m

5.4

(1.3)

4.1

£m

16.8

(3.2)

13.6

£m

17.8

(2.1)

15.7

Within one 
year

One to  
five years 

After  
five years

£m

5.6

(1.5)

4.1

£m

20.9

(4.1)

16.8

£m

21.8

(2.8)

19.0

Total

£m

40.0

(6.6)

33.4

Total

£m

48.3

(8.4)

39.9

Lease payments not recognised as a liability
The Group has elected not to recognise a lease liability for short-term leases (leases with an expected term of 12 months or less) or for 
leases of low-value assets. Payments made under such leases are expensed on a straight-line basis. The expense relating to payments 
not included in the measurement of the lease liability is as follows:

Short-term and low-value lease expenses

Year ended  
31 December 2021

Year ended  
31 December 2020

£m

-

-

£m

0.7

0.7

At 31 December 2021 the Group was committed to short-term leases and the total commitment at that date was £0.1m (2020: £0.1m).

At 31 December 2021 the Group had not committed to any leases which had not yet commenced, excluding those recognised as a lease 
liability. 

The  Group  sublets  certain  areas  of  its  property  portfolio.  As  at  31  December  2021,  the  Group  had  contracts  with  sub-tenants  for  the 
following future minimum lease rentals:

Land and buildings

Within one year

Within one to two years

Within two to three years 

Within three to four years

Within four to five years

Over five years

31 December 2021

31 December 2020

£m

0.2

0.2

0.2

0.2

0.2

1.1

2.1

£m

1.3

1.3

1.3

1.3

1.3

5.3

11.8

102

 ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

16. DERIVATIVE ASSETS AND LIABILITIES

Short-term derivative assets

Short-term derivative liabilities

Long-term derivative liabilities

Net derivative asset

31 December 2021

31 December 2020

£m

0.6

(0.3)

(0.1)

0.2

£m

1.2

(0.1)

-

1.1

Classification is based on when the derivatives mature. The fair values of derivatives are expected to impact the income statement over the 
next year, dependent on movements in the fair value of the foreign exchange contracts. The movement in the year was a £0.9m debit to the 
income statement (2020: credit of £0.3m). 

The  Group  uses  derivative  financial  instruments  to  reduce  its  exposure  to  fluctuations  in  foreign  currency  exchange  rates.  Forward 
exchange contracts have been entered into, which has committed the amount of currency below to be paid in exchange for Sterling:

Expiring in the year ending:
31 December 2022

Euro

€m

11.3

US Dollar

$m

30.1

Forward exchange contracts have been entered into, which has committed the amount of currency below to be paid in exchange for Indian 
Rupees:

Expiring in the year ending:
31 December 2022

17. TRADE AND OTHER RECEIVABLES

Trade receivables

Prepayments 

Other receivables

Accrued income

Related party receivables (note 28)

US Dollar

$m

12.0

31 December 2021

31 December 2020

£m

42.3

5.1

1.4

1.5

0.9

51.2

£m

36.2

5.3

1.1

1.4

0.9

44.9

The contractual value of trade receivables is £46.8m (2020: £42.3m). Their carrying value is assessed to be £42.3m (2020: £36.2m) after 
assessing recoverability. The contractual value and the carrying value of other receivables are considered to be the same. 

The amounts owed by related parties relate to a loan which is repayable in annual instalments and is interest bearing, as detailed in note 28. 
The amount outstanding of £0.9m represents the final repayment which was repaid in full after the balance sheet date on 31 January 2022.

The ageing analysis of net trade receivables is as follows:

Not overdue

Not more than three months overdue

More than three months but not more than one year overdue

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

31 December 2021

31 December 2020

£m

34.3

7.7

0.3

42.3

£m

29.8

6.0

0.4

36.2

103

 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

The ageing analysis of trade receivables which have been impaired is as follows:

Not overdue

Not more than three months overdue

More than three months overdue

31 December 2021

31 December 2020

£m

0.6

0.8

3.1

4.5

£m

0.4

1.1

4.6

6.1

The impaired receivables of £4.5m comprises an expected credit loss provision of £3.7m (2020: £3.9m) and credit note provision of £0.8m 
(2020: £2.2m). 

The contractual amounts of the Group’s trade receivables are denominated in the following currencies:

Pounds Sterling

US Dollar

Euro

Australian Dollar

Other

Movement on the Group’s loss allowances for trade receivables are as follows: 

Opening expected credit loss allowance

Increase in loss allowance 

Receivables written off during the year as uncollectable

Closing expected credit loss allowance

Opening credit note provision

Increase in credit note provision recognised in revenue

Increase in credit note provision charged against deferred revenue

Credit notes raised during the year

Closing credit note provision

31 December 2021

31 December 2020

£m

18.1

23.0

3.9

0.7

1.1

46.8

£m

18.4

18.8

3.4

1.1

0.6

42.3

31 December 2021

31 December 2020

£m

3.9

1.2

(1.4)

3.7

£m

5.1

1.3

(2.5)

3.9

31 December 2021

31 December 2020

£m

2.2

0.2

-

(1.6)

0.8

£m

1.2

0.4

1.3

(0.7)

2.2

Provisions are created and released on a specific customer level on a monthly basis when management assesses for possible impairment. 
In addition, the Group recognises lifetime expected credit losses (within the ECL provision) which are estimated using a provision matrix 
based on the Group’s historical credit loss experience, adjusted for factors that are specific to the debtors, general economic conditions 
and an assessment of both the current as well as the forecast direction of conditions at the reporting date. The other classes within trade 
and other receivables do not contain impaired assets.

In calculating the ECL provision, an estimate was made by management to apply an appropriate uplift to the ECL rate to take into account 
forecast  market  conditions,  including  the  expected  impact  of  COVID-19.  Management  reviewed  the  Group’s  trade  receivables  balances 
outstanding by industry in order to calculate an uplift rate which reflected the weighted average forecast risk levels present within the 
range of industries relevant to the trade receivables balance. The ECL uplift rate calculated overall was 3.35%. If the ECL uplift rate were 
increased to 5%, this would have had an impact on the ECL provision of £0.4m.

104

 ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

Details of the provision matrix are presented below:  

31 December 2021

Days

Net exposure (£m)

ECL rate

Provision (£m)

31 December 2020

Days

Net exposure (£m)

ECL rate

Provision (£m)

0-30

9.1

4.5%

0.4

0-30

7.3

5.0%

0.4

31-60

0.9

7.5%

0.1

31-60

1.0

8.1%

0.1

61-90

0.5

13.9%

0.1

61-90

0.4

13.7%

0.0

91-120

121-150

151-365

0.2

24.0%

0.0

0.3

36.0%

0.1

0.2

365+

0.0

Total

11.2

30.0%

100.0%

0.1

0.0

0.8

91-120

121-150

151-365

0.1

22.2%

0.0

0.1

32.2%

0.0

0.2

365+

0.1

Total

9.2

30.0%

100.0%

0.1

0.1

0.7

Net exposure presented in the above tables consists of gross debtors, net of specific customer provisions and unreleased deferred revenue. 

The maximum exposure to credit risk at 31 December 2021 is the carrying value of each class of receivable mentioned above. The Group 
does not hold any collateral as security. Before accepting any new customer, the Group uses a credit-scoring system to assess the potential 
customer's credit quality. The trade receivables outstanding at year end have acceptable credit scores. The largest customer represented 
less than 3% of the Group’s consolidated revenue. Further details on credit risk have been disclosed within note 21.

18. DEFERRED INCOME TAX

Balance brought forward

Tax income during the period recognised in profit or loss

Tax income during the period recognised directly in equity

Deferred taxes acquired in business combinations

Balance carried forward

The provision for deferred taxation consists of the tax effect of temporary differences in respect of:

Accelerated depreciation for tax purposes

Deferred tax on unremitted earnings in the Group’s subsidiaries

Losses available for offsetting against future taxable income

Share-based payments

Business combinations

Other temporary differences

Balance carried forward

31 December 2021

31 December 2020

£m

4.2

2.4

1.5

(6.0)

2.1

(0.2)

-

0.9

10.4

(9.5)

0.5

2.1

£m

3.9

0.3

0.3

(0.3)

4.2

(0.1)

(1.1)

1.0

7.7

(3.7)

0.4

4.2

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

105

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

Deferred tax asset

Deferred tax liability

Net position

31 December 2021

31 December 2020

£m

2.1

-

2.1

£m

5.4

(1.2)

4.2

Finance Act  2021  increased the  UK  corporation tax  rate from  19% to  25%  effective  1 April  2023 for  companies with  profits  in  excess  of 
£250,000. The Group's deferred tax assets and liabilities have therefore been remeasured at the tax rates that are expected to apply to the 
period when the asset is realised or the liability is settled. The effect of this remeasurement during the period has been recognised in both 
the income statement (£0.6m tax expense) and directly in equity (£0.4m tax income).  

The Group has tax losses of £5.6m (2020: £6.3m) that are indefinitely available for offsetting against future taxable profits of the companies 
in which the losses arose.

Deferred tax assets have not been recognised in respect of these losses as they may not be used to offset taxable profits elsewhere in 
the Group, they have arisen in subsidiaries that have been loss-making for some time, and there are no other tax planning opportunities 
or other evidence of recoverability in the near future. If the Group were able to recognise all unrecognised deferred tax assets at the UK's 
current statutory income tax rate of 19%, the profit would increase by £1.1m (2020: £1.3m).

The temporary differences associated with investments in the Group's overseas subsidiaries for which a deferred tax liability has not been 
recognised (i.e. excluding the temporary differences relating to a deferred tax liability already recognised) in the period presented aggregate 
to £28.3m (2020: £9.7m). The Group is in a position to control the timing of the reversal of these temporary differences and determined it 
is probable that they will not reverse in the foreseeable future.

There are no income tax consequences attached to the payment of dividends in either 2021 or 2020 by the Group to its shareholders.

19. TRADE AND OTHER PAYABLES

Trade payables

Other taxation and social security

Deferred revenue

Accruals

31 December 2021

31 December 2020

£m

11.1

2.9

81.4

18.9

114.3

£m

8.6

2.1

74.7

14.8

100.2

All amounts are short-term. The carrying values are considered to be a reasonable approximation of fair value. The opening deferred revenue 
balance as at 1 January 2020 was £68.6m. 

106

 ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

20.  BORROWINGS

Short-term lease liabilities

Short-term borrowings 

Current liabilities

Long-term lease liabilities

Long-term borrowings

Non-current liabilities

31 December 2021

31 December 2020

£m

4.1

5.0

9.1

29.3

195.2

224.5

The changes in the Group’s borrowings can be classified as follows:

Short-term 
borrowings

Long-term 
borrowings

Short-term lease 
liabilities1

Long-term lease 
liabilities1

1 January 2020

Cash flows:

- Repayment

- Proceeds

- Loan fees paid

Non-cash:

-  Loan fee amortisation  
until modification date

-  Fair value adjustments  

since modification

- Lease additions

- Lease liabilities2

- Reclassification

31 December 2020

Cash flows:

- Repayment

- Proceeds

- Loan fees paid

Non-cash:

-  Fair value adjustments  

since modification

- Lease additions

- Lease liabilities2

- Reclassification

As at 31 December 2021

£m

6.0

(5.3)

-

-

-

-

-

-

4.3

5.0

(5.0)

-

-

-

-

-

5.0

5.0

£m

60.5

-

15.0

(0.7)

0.1

0.2

-

-

(4.3)

70.8

-

129.0

(0.4)

0.8

-

-

(5.0)

195.2

£m

3.9

(6.1)

-

-

-

-

0.3

1.6

4.4

4.1

(5.8)

-

-

-

2.4

0.6

2.8

4.1

£m

40.7

-

-

-

-

-

-

(0.5)

(4.4)

35.8

-

-

-

-

-

(3.7)

(2.8)

29.3

1 Amounts are net of rental prepayments and accruals 

2 Represents lease interest, dilapidations and movement on lease liability accruals and prepayments

£m

4.1

5.0

9.1

35.8

70.8

106.6

Total

£m

111.1

(11.4)

15.0

(0.7)

0.1

0.2

0.3

1.1

-

115.7

(10.8)

129.0

(0.4)

0.8

2.4

(3.1)

-

233.6

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

107

 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

Term loan and RCF
In  May  2020, the  Group  announced that  it  had  agreed to  increase  its  current  banking facilities with  NatWest  Group,  HSBC  and  Bank  of 
Ireland, extending the current maturity to April 2023 (previously April 2022). The arrangements increased the total committed facility to 
£145.5m (previously £100m), plus a further uncommitted accordion facility of £75m. The committed facility comprised a term loan of £50m 
and a revolving credit facility (RCF) of £95.5m.

In  September  2021,  the  Group  amended  and  restated  its  facilities  agreement  in  order  to  convert  its  uncommitted  accordion  facility  of 
£75m into a committed incremental RCF. Silicon Valley Bank became an additional lender as part of the syndicate. No other changes to the 
repayment terms agreed in May 2020 were made.

In  December  2021,  the  Group  made  a  further  amendment  and  restatement  to  its  facilities  agreement,  increasing  the  RCF  to  £115.5m 
(previously £95.5m) to support future M&A activities. No other changes to the repayment terms agreed in May 2020 were made.

The term loan is repayable in quarterly instalments, with total repayments due in the next 12 months of £5.0m. The outstanding term loan 
balance as at 31 December 2021 is £41.3m, with a fair value in accordance with IFRS9 of £40.9m. As at 31 December 2021, the Group had 
drawn down £84.5m of the RCF and £75.0m of the incremental RCF (former accordion facility), with a total fair value in accordance with 
IFRS9 of £159.3m. Interest is currently charged on the term loan, drawn down RCF and incremental RCF (former accordion facility) at a rate 
of 3.25% over the Sterling Overnight Interbank Average Rate (SONIA).

In accordance with IFRS9, Management has performed a comparison of the fair value of the new debt with the old debt to determine whether 
there  has  been  a  substantial  modification  requiring  de-recognition.  The  assessment  concluded  that  there  has  not  been  a  substantial 
modification, the difference between the fair value of the new debt with the old debt was £0.0m.

108

 ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

21. FINANCIAL ASSETS AND LIABILITIES

The  Group  is  exposed  to  foreign  currency,  interest  rate,  liquidity,  credit  and  equity  risks.  Each  of  these  risks,  the  associated  financial 
instruments and the management of those risks are detailed below. 

The Group’s financial instruments are classified under IFRS, all at amortised cost, as follows:  

31 December 2021

31 December 2020

Non-current assets

Related party receivables

Current assets

Cash

Trade receivables

Other receivables

Accrued income

Related party receivables

Current liabilities

Trade payables

Short-term borrowings 

Accruals

Non-current liabilities

Long-term borrowings

£m

-

-

22.6

42.3

1.4

1.5

0.9

68.7

(11.1)

(5.0)

(18.9)

(35.0)

(195.2)

(195.2)

£m

0.9

0.9

17.7

36.2

1.1

1.4

0.9

57.3

(8.6)

(5.0)

(14.8)

(28.4)

(70.8)

(70.8)

The Group’s financial instruments classified under IFRS, at fair value, are as follows:  

31 December 2021

31 December 2020

Current assets

Short-term derivative assets

Current liabilities

Short-term derivative liabilities

Non-current liabilities

Long-term derivative liabilities

£m

0.6

0.6

(0.3)

(0.3)

(0.1)

(0.1)

£m

1.2

1.2

(0.1)

(0.1)

-

-

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

109

 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

Maturity analysis

31 December 2021

Current assets

Cash

Short-term derivative assets

Trade receivables

Other receivables

Accrued income

Related party receivables

Current liabilities

Short-term borrowings

Short-term derivative liabilities

Trade accounts payable

Accruals

Non-current liabilities

Long-term borrowings

Long-term derivative liabilities

Less than one 
month

One to three 
months

Three months  
to one year

£m

22.6

-

22.7

-

-

0.9

-

-

(7.5)

-

-

-

38.7

£m

-

0.2

15.8

1.4

1.5

-

(3.0)

(0.2)

(3.6)

(18.9)

-

-

(6.8)

£m

-

0.4

3.8

-

-

-

(8.9)

(0.1)

-

-

-

-

(4.8)

One to  
five years

£m

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Total

£m

22.6

0.6

42.3

1.4

1.5

0.9

(11.9)

(0.3)

(11.1)

(18.9)

(203.8)

(0.1)

(203.9)

(203.8)

(0.1)

(176.8)

31 December 2020

Less than one 
month

One to three 
months

Three months  
to one year

One to  
five years

Non-current assets

Related party receivables

Current assets

Cash

Short-term derivative assets

Trade receivables

Other receivables

Accrued income

Related party receivables

Current liabilities

Short-term borrowings

Short-term derivative liabilities

Trade accounts payable

Accruals

Non-current liabilities

Long-term borrowings

£m

-

17.7

0.1

19.6

-

-

0.9

-

-

(3.9)

-

-

34.4

£m

-

-

0.5

13.2

1.1

1.4

-

(1.8)

(0.1)

(4.7)

(14.8)

-

(5.2)

£m

-

-

0.6

3.4

-

-

-

(5.2)

-

-

-

-

(1.2)

£m

0.9

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

(73.2)

(72.3)

Total

£m

0.9

17.7

1.2

36.2

1.1

1.4

0.9

(7.0)

(0.1)

(8.6)

(14.8)

(73.2)

(44.3)

110

 ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

 
 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

The long-term borrowing’s contractual features are detailed in note 20 and it is not expected that those loans will be repaid within a year or 
until replaced with equivalent debt or equity financing. The debt shown in the table above is inclusive of the projected interest payments in 
accordance with IFRS7 (interest on short and long-term borrowings £15.5m (2020: £4.4m)). 

Reclassifications
There have been no reclassifications between financial instrument categories during the years ended 31 December 2021 and 31 December 
2020.

Fair value of financial instruments
Financial instruments are either carried at amortised cost, less any provision for impairment, or fair value. 

The Group uses the following hierarchy for determining and disclosing the fair value of financial instruments by valuation technique: 
•  Level 1 – quoted (unadjusted) prices in active markets for identical assets or liabilities; 
•  Level 2 – other techniques for which all inputs that have a significant effect on the recorded fair value are observable, either directly 

or indirectly; and 

•  Level 3 – techniques which use inputs that have a significant effect on the recorded fair value that are not based on observable 

market data. 

As  at  31  December  2021, the  only financial  instruments  measured  at fair value were  derivative financial  assets/liabilities  and these  are 
classified as Level 2.

Type of financial  
instrument at Level 2

Measurement technique

Main assumptions

Main inputs used

Derivative assets and liabilities

Present-value method

Determining the present value 
of financial instruments as the 
current value of future cash 
flows, taking into account 
current market exchange rates

Observable market exchange 
rates

There are no amounts of collateral held as security in respect of the derivative financial instruments. 

Cash, trade receivables, trade accounts payable and borrowings
The carrying amounts of cash, trade receivables and trade payables are approximately equivalent to their fair value because of the short 
term to maturity. In the case of borrowings, the floating rate of interest (SONIA, including credit adjustment spread plus margin) allows the 
carrying value to approximate to fair value. 

Market risk
The Group is exposed to market risk primarily from changes in foreign currency exchange rates and interest rates. 

Currency risk
The Group’s primary objective in managing foreign currency risk is to protect against the risk that the eventual Sterling net cash flows will 
be adversely affected by changes in foreign currency exchange rates. Due to the Group’s operations in India, the Group has entered into 
foreign exchange contracts that limit the risk from movements in US Dollars with the Indian Rupee exchange rate. The Group additionally 
enters into foreign exchange contracts that limit the risk from movements in US Dollars and Euros with Pounds Sterling.

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

111

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

The Group’s exposure to foreign currencies arising from financial instruments is:

31 December 2021

US Dollar

Exposures

Cash

Short- and long-term derivative assets/
(liabilities)

Trade receivables

Trade accounts payable

Net exposure

£m

8.2

-

23.0

(0.9)

30.3

31 December 2020

US Dollar

Exposures

Cash

Short- and long-term derivative assets/
(liabilities)

Trade receivables

Trade accounts payable

Net exposure

£m

4.2

1.1

18.9

(0.3)

23.9

Euro

£m

1.7

0.2

3.9

-

5.8

Euro

£m

0.7

-

3.4

-

4.1

Other

£m

5.0

-

1.2

(0.1)

6.1

Other

£m

5.0

-

0.7

(0.5)

5.2

Total

£m

14.9

0.2

28.1

(1.0)

42.2

Total

£m

9.9

1.1

23.0

(0.8)

33.2

Forecast sales and purchases in foreign currencies have not been included in the table above as they are not financial instruments.

As at 31 December, a movement of 10% in Sterling (reflecting a significant but reasonably plausible scenario) would impact the income 
statement as detailed in the table below:

Impact on profit before income tax:

US Dollar

Euro

                                  10% decrease

                                  10% increase

2021

£m

3.4

0.6

4.0

2020

£m

2.6

0.4

3.0

2021

£m

(2.8)

(0.5)

(3.3)

2020

£m

(2.2)

(0.4)

(2.6)

This analysis assumes a movement in Sterling across all currencies and only includes the effect of foreign exchange movements on financial 
instruments. All other variables remain constant.

Interest rate risk
The Group is exposed to interest rate risk on its overdraft and the outstanding syndicated loans. The Group does not manage this risk with 
the use of derivatives. No other liabilities accrue interest. The table below shows how a movement in interest rates of 100 basis points 
(reflecting a significant but reasonably plausible scenario) would impact the income statement based on the additional interest expense 
for the year then ended:

                                                 100 basis point decrease                                       100 basis point increase

Impact on:

Net earnings before income tax

This analysis assumes all other variables remain constant.

2021

£m

2.0

2020

£m

0.8

2021

£m

(2.0)

2020

£m

(0.8)

112

 ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

Liquidity risk
Liquidity risk represents the Group’s ability to meet its contractual obligations. The Group evaluates its liquidity requirements on an ongoing 
basis. In general, the Group generates sufficient cash flows from its operating activities to meet its financial liabilities.

The Group’s main source of financing for its working capital requirements is free cash flow. 

The  Group’s  exposure  to  liquidity  risk  arises  from  trade  accounts  payable  and  syndicated  loans.  All  contractual  cash  flows  from  trade 
accounts payable are the same as the carrying value of the liability due to their short-term nature. 

At 31 December 2021, the Group has a revolving credit facility of £115.5m, an incremental facility (former accordion facility) of £75.0m and 
a £50.0m term loan (of which £41.3m is outstanding as at 31 December 2021). See note 20 for further details.

Credit risk
In the normal course of its business, the Group is exposed to credit risk from cash and trade and other receivables. The Group’s financial 
instruments do not have significant concentration of risk with any related parties.  

A total of £68.7m of the Group’s assets are subject to credit risk (31 December 2020: £58.2m). The Group does not hold any collateral over 
these amounts. See note 17 for further details of the Group’s receivables. 

The Group operates a credit risk management process within the finance and credit control teams. The process starts prior to a contract 
being  entered  into, whereby factors  such  as  company  size,  location  and  payment  history  are taken  into  account  before the  contract  is 
signed. Following the commencement of the contract, which is usually signed on a zero-day payment policy unless other agreements are 
reached, the credit control team will monitor debt in reference to the due date. When the credit control team starts to assess that the debt 
is becoming more of a credit risk (usually around 90 days after the due date or sooner if escalated) it is then escalated to our internal debt 
recovery team. At this point the debt recovery team will review on a debt-by-debt basis, taking into consideration:

the responses received back from the client;
internal responses from the client service and account management team;
the status of the transfer of services, such as delays and disputes; and

• 
• 
• 
•  a reassessment of credit worthiness.

The debt recovery team and credit manager will then decide whether an impairment is made, but the team will continue to pursue the debt 
and also use means such as legal advice to further advance the process. In cases such as contract errors or delivery disputes, whereby we 
are either at fault or a commercial decision to appease the client has been made, credit notes are issued.

Following  the  detailed  line-by-line  review  of  debts  and  potential  impairment,  an  overall  review  will  be  made  of  the  reasonableness  of 
provision for potential credit write-off based upon the write-off as a percentage of revenue which guides management as to the general 
trend of credit write-off. The write-off history, including 2021, is shown as below:

Revenue (£m)

Provision added  
for bad debt (£m)

% of revenue

2021

189.3

1.4

0.7%

2020

178.4

1.7

1.0%

2019

     178.2 

2.9

1.6%

2018

157.6

2.4

1.5%

2017

118.6

0.8

0.7%

2016

100.0

0.9

0.9%

2015

60.5

0.8

1.3%

Management  has  provided  for  all  debts  greater  than  one  year,  except  for  instances  whereby  there  is  sufficient  reasonable  grounds  of 
recovery. This will be assessed by the nature of the debts and communication between the Group and the clients involved.

Once the debt recovery team has explored all particular avenues of recovery, including legal advice and professional recovery services, and 
the debt is deemed completely unrecoverable (i.e. the customer is in default), the amount is fully written off from the debt ledger and from 
within the provision.

At each year end and half year, management will assess for further impairment based upon expected credit loss over and above the specific 
impairments noted through the year. Management also takes into account forward-looking information (including macro-economic data) 
when making this assessment.  

The Group considers the current level of its allowance for doubtful debts to be adequate to cover expected credit losses on trade receivables. 
Bad debt expenses are reported in the income statement.

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

113

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

Equity risk
It  is the  Group’s  policy to  maintain  a  strong  capital  base  so  as to  maintain  investor,  creditor  and  market  confidence  and to  sustain the 
development of the business. See note 23 for further details of the Group’s equity. The impact of the sensitivity analysis noted in the various 
risk categories above would impact the income statement for the year.

22. PROVISIONS

The movement in the provisions is as follows:

At 1 January 2020

Increase in provision

At 31 December 2020

Increase in provision

Utilised

Business combination additions

At 31 December 2021

Current:

Non-current:

Dilapidations
Right-of-use 
assets

Dilapidations
Other

£m

0.4

-

0.4

0.1

-

-

0.5

-

0.5

£m

0.2

0.1

0.3

-

(0.1)

0.1

0.3

0.1

0.2

Total

£m

0.6

0.1

0.7

0.1

(0.1)

0.1

0.8

0.1

0.7

Dilapidations
Provision has been made for the net present value of future dilapidations that are owed due to legal or constructive obligations under the 
Group’s operating leases of office premises. The provision is expected to be utilised over the period to the end of each specific lease, over 
a period of less than one year to 12 years. Due to the nature of the obligations, there is a good degree of certainty over the amount and 
timing of the expected cash flows. There is no expectation of reimbursement in relation to these obligations. 

23. EQUITY

Share capital

Authorised, allotted, called up and fully paid:

                             31 December 2021

                                   31 December 2020

No’000

£000s

No’000

£000s

Ordinary shares (1/14th pence)

Deferred shares of £1.00 each

Total authorised, allotted,  
called up and fully paid

118,303

100

118,403

84

100

184

118,303

100

118,403

84

100

184

Share purchases
As detailed in note 24, during the year the Group’s Employee Benefit Trust purchased an aggregate amount of 2,860,648 shares (representing 
2% of the total share capital), each with a nominal value of 1/14th pence, at a total market value of £46.5m. The purchased shares will be 
held for the purpose of satisfying the exercise of share options under the Company’s Employee Share Option Plan. 

During the year, a total of 125,000 shares (representing 0.11% of the total share capital), each with a nominal value of 1/14th pence, which 
were held by the Group’s Employee Benefit Trust were utilised as a result of the vesting of Bernard Cragg’s share options (at a total market 
value of £1.9m), as disclosed in note 24. 

The maximum number of shares (each with a nominal value of 1/14th pence) held by the Employee Benefit Trust (at any time during the year 
ended 31 December 2021) was 4,801,890 (representing 4% of the total share capital).

114

 ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

Capital management
The Group’s capital management objectives are:
• 
• 

to ensure the Group’s ability to continue as a going concern; and
to fund future growth and provide an adequate return to shareholders and, when appropriate, distribute dividends.

The capital structure of the Group consists of net debt, which includes borrowings (note 20) and cash and cash equivalents, and equity.

The Company has two classes of shares. The ordinary shares carry no right to fixed income and each share carries the right to one vote at 
general meetings of the Company. 

The deferred shares do not confer upon the holders the right to receive any dividend, distribution or other participation in the profits of the 
Company. The deferred shares do not entitle the holders to receive notice of or to attend and speak or vote at any general meeting of the 
Company. On distribution of assets on liquidation or otherwise, the surplus assets of the Company remaining after payments of its liabilities 
shall be applied first in repaying to holders of the deferred shares the nominal amounts and any premiums paid up or credited as paid up 
on such shares, and second, the balance of such assets shall belong to and be distributed among the holders of the ordinary shares in 
proportion to the nominal amounts paid up on the ordinary shares held by them respectively.

There are no specific restrictions on the size of a holding nor on the transfer of shares, which are both governed by the general provisions 
of the Articles of Association and prevailing legislation. The Directors are not aware of any agreements between holders of the Company’s 
shares that may result in restrictions on the transfer of securities or on voting rights. 

No person has any special rights of control over the Company’s share capital and all its issued shares are fully paid. 

With regard to the appointment and replacement of Directors, the Company is governed by its Articles of Association, the Companies Act 
and related legislation. The Articles themselves may be amended by special resolution of the shareholders. The powers of Directors are 
described in the Board Terms of Reference, copies of which are available on request. 

Capital reduction
On  19  May  2021,  following  the  passing  of  Special  Resolutions  at  the  Group’s  Annual  General  Meeting,  GlobalData  Plc  (“the  Company”) 
reduced  its  merger  reserve  and  other  reserve  by  a  total  of  £171.0m,  by  way  of  a  bonus  issue  of  shares  which  were  shortly  thereafter 
cancelled and further resolved to cancel the Company’s share premium account.  The share premium account totalled £0.7m, meaning that 
as a result of these actions, distributable reserves increased by a total of £171.7m. The Directors are permitted to allot shares and convert 
the merger reserve and other reserve into shares under section 551 of the Companies Act 2006.

Merger reserve and other reserve
The merger reserve contained the premium on the shares issued in consideration for the purchase of GlobalData Holding Limited in 2016 
and the  premium  on the  shares  issued  in  consideration for the  purchase  of  Research Views  Limited  and  its  subsidiaries  in  2018.  Other 
reserves  consisted  of  a  reserve  created  upon  the  reverse  acquisition  of  TMN  Group  Plc  in  2009.  The  parent  company’s  reserve  differs 
from this due to the restatement of consolidated reserves at the time of the reverse acquisition. The parent company other reserve was 
generated in 2008 upon the issue of shares to fund acquisitions.

In  order to  utilise the  merger  reserve  and  other  reserve to  create  additional  distributable  reserves,  it was  necessary to  capitalise those 
reserves, totalling £171.0m, by way of a bonus issue of new shares (named the Capital Reduction Shares) and thereafter cancel the Capital 
Reduction Shares. At the Annual General Meeting held on 20 April 2021, the Company’s shareholders approved by way of Special Resolution 
to carry out the Capital Reduction Bonus Issue. The Capital Reduction Shares were allotted and issued on 17 May 2021. The Court confirmed 
the cancellation of the Capital Reduction Shares at a Court Hearing held on 19 May 2021.

The Capital Reduction Shares were not admitted to trading on any regulated market. No share certificates were issued in respect of the 
Capital Reduction Shares. The Capital Reduction Shares had extremely limited rights. In particular, the Capital Reduction Shares carried no 
rights to vote, no rights to participate in the profits of the Company and no rights to participate in the Company’s assets, save on a winding-
up in extremely limited circumstances, such that they have no effective market value.

Share premium account
The share premium account had arisen as a result of the vesting of share options, held by employees of the Company’s group. Under the 
Companies Act, the amount credited to the share premium account constitutes a non-distributable reserve. At the Annual General Meeting 
held  on  20 April  2021, the  Company’s  shareholders  approved  by way  of  Special  Resolution the  cancellation  of  its whole  share  premium 
account. The cancellation was subsequently confirmed by the Court on 19 May 2021.

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

115

 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

Impact of capital reduction
There has been no impact on the nominal value of the ordinary shares, and there has been no dilution to holders of ordinary shares. There 
was also no impact on the Company’s cash position or on its net assets, and the capital reduction did not itself involve any distribution or 
repayment of capital or share premium and will not result in any changes to the Group’s existing dividend policy.

Dividends
The final dividend for 2020 was 11.6 pence per share and was paid in April 2021. The total dividend for the current year is 19.3 pence per 
share, with an interim dividend of 6.1 pence per share paid on 1 October 2021 to shareholders on the register at the close of business on 3 
September 2021, and a final dividend of 13.2 pence per share will be paid on 29 April 2022 to shareholders on the register at the close of 
business on 1 April 2022. The ex-dividend date will be on 31 March 2022.

Following the 2020 year end, the Directors became aware that the Company had made unlawful distributions in 2018, 2019 and 2020 on 
account  of the fact that  it  had  incorrectly  included  reserves  arising from  share-based  payments,  relating to  employees  of  subsidiaries, 
as distributable and had not filed interim accounts in accordance with section 838 of the Companies Act 2006 to demonstrate sufficient 
reserves were available for distribution. Therefore, during the period from May 2018 through to January 2021, contributions made to the 
Employee Benefit Trust, in order to buy-back shares to satisfy the employee share options plan, and distributions by way of dividends were 
unlawful distributions in accordance with section 838 of the Companies Act 2006.  

In order to correct the position, the Company filed interim (unaudited) accounts with Companies House on 23 March 2021 (in advance of 
the Annual General Meeting) to demonstrate it had sufficient reserves. At the Company’s Annual General Meeting, the Company proposed a 
resolution to remove any right the Company may have had to claim from Directors and Shareholders in respect of the relevant contributions 
and distributions. The payments deemed to be unlawful during this period were £7.1m in 2018, £18.3m in 2019, £34.8m in 2020 and £0.3m in 
January 2021. Upstream dividends were paid in advance of the interim accounts to create additional distributable reserves in the Company 
and the resolutions regularised the matter. In addition, as disclosed above, the Company undertook a Capital Reduction and cancelled the 
Share Premium account which created additional distributable reserves of £171.7m. Interim (unaudited) accounts were filed on 31 May 2021 
to demonstrate sufficient distributable reserves in advance of the interim dividend being paid. 

Treasury reserve
The treasury reserve represents the cost of shares held in the Group’s Employee Benefit Trust for the purpose of satisfying the exercise of 
share options under the Company’s Employee Share Option Plan.

The disclosures above are for both the Group and the Company.

Foreign currency translation reserve
The foreign currency translation reserve contains the translation differences that arise upon translating the results of subsidiaries with a 
functional currency other than Sterling. Such exchange differences are recognised in the income statement in the period in which a foreign 
operation is disposed of.

116

 ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

24. SHARE-BASED PAYMENTS

Scheme 1
The Group created a share option scheme during the year ended 31 December 2010 and granted the first options under the scheme on 
1 January 2011 to certain senior employees. Each option granted converts to one ordinary share on exercise. A participant may exercise 
their  options  subject to  employment  conditions  and Adjusted  EBITDA targets  being  met.  For these  options to  be  exercised the  Group’s 
earnings before interest, taxation, depreciation and amortisation, as adjusted by the Remuneration Committee for significant or one-off 
occurrences, must exceed certain targets. The fair values of options granted were determined using the Black-Scholes model. The inputs 
used in the model were:
•  share price at date of grant;
•  exercise price;
• 
•  annual risk-free interest rate; and
•  annualised volatility.

time to maturity;

The following assumptions were used in the valuation:

Award tranche

Grant date

Fair value  
of share price  
at grant date

Exercise price  
(pence)

Estimated  
forfeiture  
rate p.a.

Weighted average 
of remaining 
contractual life 
(years)

Award 1

Award 3

Award 4

Award 6

Award 7

Award 8

Award 9 

Award 10

Award 11

Award 12

Award 13

Award 14

Award 15

Award 16

Award 17

Award 18

Award 19

Award 20

Award 21

Award 22

Award 23

Award 24

Award 25

Award 26

Award 27

Award 28

Award 29

1 January 2011

1 May 2012

7 March 2014

22 September 2014

9 December 2014

31 December 2014

21 April 2015

28 September 2015

17 March 2016

17 March 2016

21 October 2016

21 March 2017

21 March 2017

21 March 2017

21 September 2017

20 March 2018

20 March 2018

23 October 2018

23 October 2018

23 October 2018

19 March 2019

22 October 2019

14 February 2020

23 March 2020

23 June 2020

22 September 2020

23 March 2021

£1.089

£1.866

£2.550

£2.525

£2.075

£2.025

£1.980

£2.420

£2.380

£2.380

£4.300

£5.240

£5.240

£5.240

£5.540

£5.910

£5.910

£5.270

£5.270

£5.270

£5.860

£8.189

£12.500

£9.080

£13.910

£14.260

£13.480

0.0714p

0.0714p

0.0714p

0.0714p

0.0714p

0.0714p

0.0714p

0.0714p

0.0714p

0.0714p

0.0714p

0.0714p

0.0714p

0.0714p

0.0714p

0.0714p

0.0714p

0.0714p

0.0714p

0.0714p

0.0714p

0.0714p

0.0714p

0.0714p

0.0714p

0.0714p

0.0714p

Awards 2 and 5 have been fully forfeited.

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

117

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

The  estimated  forfeiture  rate  assumption  is  based  upon  management’s  expectation  of  the  number  of  options  that  will  lapse  over  the 
vesting period. The assumptions were determined when the scheme was set up in 2011 and are reviewed annually. Management believes 
the current assumptions to be reasonable based upon the rate of lapsed options and proximity to the vesting targets.

Each of the awards are subject to the vesting criteria set by the Remuneration Committee. In order for the remaining options to be exercised, 
the Group’s earnings before interest, taxation, depreciation and amortisation, as adjusted by the Remuneration Committee for significant 
or one-off occurrences, must exceed the remaining target of £52m in any one year before the end of the period in which the options are 
exercisable, which is generally 10 years from the date of the grant (£52m target excludes the impact of IFRS16). 

As noted in the Remuneration Report, the Remuneration Committee has received notification from the Audit Committee that the quality of 
Adjusted EBITDA in 2021 of £58.6m was in excess of the £52m performance target and is, therefore, sufficient to satisfy the final tranche 
of the Scheme 1 options. Employees within this scheme will have the opportunity to exercise their vested options following the publication 
of our 2021 results (total of 6.5 million shares). Scheme 1 will then be closed.

Group achieves  
£10m Adjusted EBITDA

Group achieves  
£32m Adjusted EBITDA

Group achieves  
£41m Adjusted EBITDA1

Group achieves  
£52m Adjusted EBITDA1

Awards 1-4

20% Vest

Award 6

Award 7

Award 8

Award 9

Award 10

Award 12

Award 13

Award 14

Award 15

Award 16

Award 17

Award 18

Award 19

Award 20

Award 21

Award 22

Award 23

Award 24

Award 25

Award 26

Award 27

Award 28

Award 29

N/a

N/a

N/a

N/a

N/a

N/a

N/a

N/a

N/a

N/a

N/a

N/a

N/a

N/a

N/a

N/a

N/a

N/a

N/a

N/a

N/a

N/a

N/a

20% Vest

25% Vest

20% Vest

25% Vest

20% Vest

N/a

17.5% Vest

17.5% Vest

17.5% Vest

12.5% Vest

25% Vest

10% Vest

10% Vest

N/a

N/a

N/a

N/a

N/a

N/a

N/a

N/a

N/a

N/a

N/a

20% Vest

25% Vest

20% Vest

25% Vest

20% Vest

N/a

17.5% Vest

17.5% Vest

17.5% Vest

12.5% Vest

25% Vest

10% Vest

10% Vest

N/a

N/a

14% Vest

33% Vest

10% Vest

N/a

N/a

N/a

N/a

N/a

N/a

40% Vest

50% Vest

60% Vest

50% Vest

60% Vest

100% Vest

65% Vest

65% Vest

65% Vest

75% Vest

50% Vest

80% Vest

80% Vest

100% Vest

100% Vest

86% Vest

67% Vest

90% Vest

100% Vest

100% Vest

100% Vest

100% Vest

100% Vest

100% Vest

Note 1: Excluding the impact of IFRS16

Award 11 relates to options awarded to the Group’s previous Chairman, Bernard Cragg, during 2016. These did not carry any performance 
obligations and vested at a point in time. 125,000 options vested on 31 January 2019 and the remaining 125,000 vested on 31 January 2021 
and were exercised on 26 April 2021. 

The  total  charge  recognised  for  the  scheme  during  the  12  months  to  31  December  2021  was  £6.3m  (2020:  £2.8m). The  awards  of  the 
scheme are settled with ordinary shares of the Company. 

During the year, the Group purchased an aggregate amount of 2,860,648 shares at a total market value of £46.5m. The purchased shares 
will be held in treasury and in the Group’s Employee Benefit Trust for the purpose of satisfying the exercise of share options under the 
Company’s Employee Share Option Plan.

118

 ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

 
 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

Reconciliation of movement in the number of options is provided below.

31 December 2020

Granted

Exercised

Forfeited

31 December 2021

Option price (pence)

Number of options

1/14th

1/14th

1/14th

1/14th

1/14th

6,940,837

70,000

(125,000)

(338,280)

6,547,557

The following table summarises the Group’s share options outstanding for Scheme 1 at each year end:

Reporting date

31 December 2011

31 December 2012

31 December 2013

31 December 2014

31 December 2015

31 December 2016

31 December 2017

31 December 2018

31 December 2019

31 December 2020

31 December 2021

Options  
outstanding

Option price  
(pence)

Remaining life  
(years)

5,004,300

4,931,150

4,775,050

8,358,880

7,557,840

9,450,183

10,621,857

10,808,861

8,853,882

6,940,837

6,547,557

1/14th

1/14th

1/14th

1/14th

1/14th

1/14th

1/14th

1/14th

1/14th

1/14th

1/14th

3.7

4.3

3.3

2.5

2.5

3.2

2.2

1.4

1.0

1.0

0.0

Scheme 2 - 2019 scheme
In  October  2019, the  Group  created  and  announced  a  new  share  option  scheme  and  granted the first  options  under the  scheme  on  31 
October  2019 to  certain  senior  employees.  Each  option  granted  converts to  one  ordinary  share  on  exercise. A  participant  may  exercise 
their options subject to employment conditions and performance targets being met. For these options to be exercised, the Group’s share 
price must reach certain targets. The fair values of options granted were determined using the Monte Carlo method. The inputs used in the 
model were:
•  grant date; 
•  vesting date;
•  performance start and end date;
•  expected term; 
• 
risk-free rate;
•  dividend yield;
•  volatility; and
•  share price at date of grant.

The awards shall vest based upon the following performance conditions being satisfied: 
• 

100% of the shares subject to the award will vest provided the compounded annual growth in the Group’s Total Shareholder Return (TSR) 
performance over the 5-year performance period is equal to or exceeds 16% per annum compounded (the "5-Year TSR Target"). 

•  The 5-Year TSR Target will be measured by taking a baseline price per share of 830p and comparing it to the sum of the average closing 
price of a share derived from the ‘official list’ over the period of 20 trading days, commencing on the business day on which the Group 
announces its annual results for the period ending 31 December 2024 and all dividends paid during the performance period. 

To the extent that the 5-Year TSR Target has not been met, the awards will not vest. If any of the events pursuant to the rules covering 
‘takeovers and other corporate events’ occur during the performance period or prior to the vesting date, awards shall vest as follows: 
•  Where the 5-Year TSR Target has been met at the date of the relevant event, 100% of the awards shall vest. 
•  Where  the  5-Year  TSR  Target  has  not  been  achieved,  but  a  16%  compound  annual  TSR  has  been  met  over  the  period  from  the 
commencement of the performance period, awards shall vest on a pro-rata basis to reflect the proportion of the performance period 
which has elapsed, although the Company shall have discretion to waive such time pro-rating if they consider it appropriate.

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

119

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

The following assumptions were used in the valuation:

Award tranche

Grant date

Fair value  
of share price  
at grant date

Exercise price  
(pence)

Estimated  
forfeiture  
rate p.a.

Weighted average 
of remaining 
contractual life 
(years)

Award 1

Award 2

Award 3

Award 4

Award 5

Award 6

Award 7

31 October 2019

7 May 2020

25 May 2020

23 June 2020

22 September 2020

17 November 2020

23 March 2021

£2.02

£4.62

£5.50

£6.12

£6.35

£7.12

£5.15

0.0714p

0.0714p

0.0714p

0.0714p

0.0714p

0.0714p

0.0714p

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

3.0

3.0

3.0

3.0

3.0

3.0

3.0

The  estimated  forfeiture  rate  assumption  is  based  upon  management’s  expectation  of  the  number  of  options  that  will  lapse  over  the 
vesting period and are reviewed annually. Management believes the current assumptions to be reasonable.

The  total  charge  recognised  for  the  scheme  during  the  12  months  to  31  December  2021  was  £2.9m  (2020:  £1.4m).  The  awards  of  the 
scheme are settled with ordinary shares of the Company. 

Reconciliation of movement in the number of options is provided below.

31 December 2020

Granted

Forfeited

31 December 2021

Option price (pence)

Number of options

1/14th

1/14th

1/14th

1/14th

3,025,000

1,040,000

(405,000)

3,660,000

The following table summarises the Group’s share options outstanding at each year end:

Reporting date

31 December 2019

31 December 2020

31 December 2021

Options outstanding

Option price (pence)

Remaining life (years)

1,400,000

3,025,000

3,660,000

1/14th

1/14th

1/14th

5.00

4.00

3.00

25. CONTINGENT LIABILITIES AND CAPITAL COMMITMENTS

As at 31 December 2021, a subsidiary of GlobalData Plc has ongoing claims with former employees. The Group disputes the claims and 
management  believes the  cases  can  be  successfully  defended, with the  range  of  outcomes  expected to  be  between  $0.4m-$2m. The 
Group’s insurance policy covers the initial $0.7m charged, therefore the maximum income statement impact is anticipated to be $1.3m. 
Through reference to IAS37, management has concluded that a possible obligation exists in which an economic outflow is neither remote 
nor probable, and there are too many variables to make a reliable estimate at this stage; therefore the Group is treating these claims as 
contingent liabilities and, as such, has not recognised a liability in the financial statements of the Group as at 31 December 2021. 

There were no capital commitments at 31 December 2021 (2020: £nil).

120

 ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

26. RETIREMENT BENEFIT SCHEMES

As  a  result  of the  Research Views  Limited  acquisition  in  March  2018, the  Group  had  a final  salary  defined  benefit  pension  scheme, the 
Progressive Media Markets Limited Pension Scheme. On 16 December 2019 the Group entered into an irrevocable agreement to sell the 
pension scheme to Just Retirement Limited (“Just”). The buy-in involved the purchase of a qualifying insurance policy at a net cost to 
GlobalData Plc of £1.3m which was recognised in the financial statements for the year ending 31 December 2019. Final buyout took place 
on 22 February 2021, meaning the Group no longer consolidates a pension asset or liability on the statement of financial position as at 31 
December 2021.

27. ACQUISITIONS

Life Sciences
On 1 November 2021, the Group acquired the trade and assets of the Life Sciences business from IHS Markit for consideration of US$50.0m. 
Life  Sciences  offers  comprehensive  and  independent  coverage  of  drug  pricing,  reimbursement  and  market  access  trends,  as  well  as 
healthcare forecasts and healthcare economic data microsimulation modelling. These capabilities represent a strategic bolt-on addition to 
our existing pharmaceuticals vertical and will result in a true end-to-end offering with industry-leading breadth and depth for our clients.

The amounts recognised for each class of assets and liabilities at the acquisition date were as follows:

Carrying value

Fair value 
adjustments

Fair value

Intangible assets consisting of:

Customer relationships

IP rights and Database

Net assets acquired consisting of:

Trade and other receivables

Trade and other payables

Deferred tax

Fair value of net (liabilities)/assets acquired

The goodwill recognised in relation to the acquisition is as follows:

Consideration 

Less net assets acquired 

Goodwill

£m

--

-

1.1

(2.5)

-

(1.4)

£m

4.3

10.1

-

0.4

(0.4)

14.4

£m

4.3

10.1

1.1

(2.1)

(0.4)

13.0

Fair value

£m

36.4

(13.0)

23.4

In line with the provision of IFRS3, fair value adjustments may be required within the 12-month period from the date of acquisition. Any 
fair value adjustments will result in an adjustment to the goodwill balance reported above. The goodwill that arose on the combination can 
be attributed to the assembled workforce, know-how and research methodology. The fair values of the identified intangible assets were 
calculated in line with the policies detailed on page 84.

The Group incurred legal and professional expenses of £1.4m in relation to the acquisition. In the period from the date of acquisition to 
31 December 2021, the trade of Life Sciences generated revenues of £1.0m and contribution of £0.3m. The amount of goodwill which is 
expected to be deductible for tax purposes is £9.5m.

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

121

 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

LMC
On 15 December 2021, the Group acquired 100% of the share capital of two groups of companies, named LMCA Holdings Limited and LMCI 
Holdings Limited, for consideration of £72.7m. The companies within these groups provide data, analytics, and insights of the Automotive 
and Agribusiness markets respectively. The acquisitions add further scale and capabilities to the Group’s existing Automotive intelligence 
proposition and bring new and unique gold standard Agribusiness data to broaden and complement the existing sector coverage.

The amounts recognised for each class of assets and liabilities at the acquisition date were as follows:

Carrying value

Fair value 
adjustments

Fair value

Intangible assets consisting of:

Customer relationships

IP rights and Database

Brand

Net assets acquired consisting of:

Property, plant and equipment

Intangible assets

Cash and cash equivalents

Trade and other receivables

Trade and other payables

Provisions

Corporation tax payable

Deferred tax

Fair value of net assets acquired

The goodwill recognised in relation to the acquisition is as follows:

Consideration 

Less net assets acquired 

Goodwill

£m

-

-

-

0.1

0.7

7.4

2.5

(6.2)

(0.1)

(0.4)

-

4.0

£m

7.5

15.2

0.1

-

-

-

(0.1)

0.6

-

-

(5.6)

17.7

£m

7.5

15.2

0.1

0.1

0.7

7.4

2.4

(5.6)

(0.1)

(0.4)

(5.6)

21.7

Fair value
£m

72.7

(21.7)

51.0

In line with the provision of IFRS3, fair value adjustments may be required within the 12-month period from the date of acquisition. Any 
fair value adjustments will result in an adjustment to the goodwill balance reported above. The goodwill that arose on the combination can 
be attributed to the assembled workforce, know-how and research methodology. The fair values of the identified intangible assets were 
calculated in line with the policies detailed on page 84.

The Group incurred legal and professional expenses of £0.8m in relation to the acquisition. In the period from the date of acquisition to 31 
December 2021, the trade of LMC generated revenues of £0.5m and profit before tax of £0.0m.

The amount of goodwill which is expected to be deductible for tax purposes is £nil.

122

 ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

Cash Cost of Acquisitions
The cash cost of acquisitions comprises:

Acquisition of Life Sciences

Acquisition of LMC:

        Cash consideration

        Cash acquired

Deferred consideration payment CHM Research Limited

Deferred consideration payment Competenet

31 December 2021
£m

35.3

68.8

(7.4)

0.6

0.4

97.7

Cash consideration for both Life Sciences and LMC are net of bonuses which have been borne by the acquiree however will be settled by 
the Group post-acquisition.

28. RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS

Mike Danson, GlobalData’s Chief Executive Officer, owned 64.1% of the Company’s ordinary shares as at 31 December 2021 and 63.1% as at 
28 February 2022, and is therefore the ultimate controlling party. Mike Danson owns a number of businesses that interact with GlobalData 
Plc, largely in part as a result of past M&A transactions (GlobalData Holdings in 2016 and Research Views Limited in 2018). 

It is the intention of the Board and management to reduce and eventually eliminate the number of related party transactions and wind 
down the  service  agreements that  are  currently  in  place. The  Related  Party Transactions  Committee,  consisting  of four  Non-Executive 
directors, oversees related party transactions and reviews to ensure that the transactions are in the best interest of GlobalData and its 
stakeholders, and that the transactions are recorded and disclosed on an arm's length basis. 

Accommodation 
During 2021, we have made significant progress towards this goal. In particular, as at 31 December 2021, the Group now has no related party 
landlords, following the sale of the John Carpenter and Essex Street properties by the Estel Properties Group to third party landlords, and 
secondly, the surrender of the Hatton Garden lease by GlobalData. The surrender of the lease is beneficial to the Group and removes the 
liability, which was due to run to 2028, and a non-cash gain of £129,000 has been recognised on disposal of the lease. This represents the 
difference between the value of the lease asset and lease liability under IFRS16 at the date of surrender. 

Prior to the removal of the related party relationship with the landlord, the Group incurred accommodation charges of £0.8m (2020: £2.9m).

In addition, GlobalData Plc sub-leases office space to other companies owned by Mike Danson. The total sub-lease income for the year 
ended 31 December 2021 was £0.4m (2020: £1.3m).

Corporate support services
Corporate support charges of £0.2m (2020: £0.4m), which principally consist of shared IT as well as payroll, facilities and HR support which 
has now ceased. These have been recharged on a consistent basis to the previous year and are determined by specific drivers of cost such 
as proportional occupancy of building for facilities and headcount for IT, HR and payroll services. 

Loan to Progressive Trade Media Limited
Interest income on the outstanding loan of £0.05m was credited to the income statement (2020: £0.1m), based upon a rate of 2.25% above 
LIBOR. The initial £4.5m loan issued has one further instalment of £0.9m remaining and was repaid in full after the balance sheet date on 
31 January 2022. 

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

123

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

Revenue contract containing IP sharing clause
The ongoing data services agreement with NS Media Group Limited (“NSMGL”), a related party by virtue of common ownership, continued 
into its second year of the five-year service contract signed in June 2020. The agreed suite of data services provided to NSMGL have been 
contracted on terms equivalent to those that prevail in arm’s length transactions. During the first half of 2021, the content delivery was 
modified based upon the client’s revised requirements. Therefore, the revenue arising in the year has reduced compared to the original 
contractual terms. In the year ended 31 December 2021, the total revenue generated from this contract was £1.4m and the net contribution 
generated was £0.8m. Each year’s fixed fees are invoiced quarterly in advance.

In addition to the IP and content, there are other shared costs such as software development, webinar production, lead generation and 
content creation platforms with NSMGL, for which GlobalData received a net charge of £0.01m.

Other
In March 2021, the Group hired 51 employees who at the time were working for NSMGL. The Related Party Transactions Committee oversaw 
the hiring process and all negotiations and contracting was done directly with the employees themselves. No fees or compensation were 
given to NSMGL.

Separately, GlobalData purchased two start-up websites from NSMGL for £55,000. These websites, energymonitor.ai and investmentmonitor.
ai, were new websites with no revenues or sales contracts attached and low audience figures. The valuation was conducted on an arm's 
length basis and benchmarked audience figures and comparable valuations, as well as using a discounted cash-flow valuation. The Related 
Party Transactions Committee reviewed the calculations to ensure a fair and reasonable arm's length basis was used.

Because  of the  proximity  of the  hire  of the team from  NSMGL  and the  purchase  of the websites,  management  reviewed the  provisions 
of  IFRS3:  Business  Combinations  to  assess  whether  the  fact  pattern  met  the  requirements  of  a  business  combination.  Management 
concluded that the assets and the team being brought into GlobalData did not constitute the definition of a business under IFRS3, because 
the majority of the inputs that the team will be applying process to are pre-existing GlobalData assets and there were no outputs brought 
into the Group (no revenues, contracts or customer relationships). Therefore, management concluded that this did not meet the definition 
of a business combination under IFRS3.

Balances outstanding
As at 31 December 2021, the total balance receivable from NSMGL was £nil. There is no specific credit loss provision in place in relation to 
this receivable and the total expense recognised during the period in respect of bad or doubtful debts was £nil.

The Group has taken advantage of the exemptions contained within IAS24: Related Party Disclosures from the requirement to disclose 
transactions between Group companies as these have been eliminated on consolidation. The amounts outstanding for other related parties 
were £0.9m due within one year owed from Progressive Trade Media Limited for the outstanding loan (2020: £1.9m). There were no other 
balances owing to or from related parties.

Directors and Key Management Personnel
The remuneration of Directors is disclosed within the Directors’ Remuneration Report on page 61. 

124

 ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

Subsidiary undertakings 
The Group has a large number of subsidiaries due to the M&A activities in recent years. The Group is continuing to go through a corporate 
simplification process to reduce the number of its subsidiaries, focusing operations through its main subsidiaries in its main territories. 

The Group owns 100% of the ordinary shares of all subsidiary undertakings listed below with the exception of LMC Automotive (Thailand) 
Company Limited, which is 49% owned. This entity is being fully consolidated into the Group on the basis that the Group holds majority 
voting rights for the entity and has exposure to variable returns, therefore management has assessed that the Group has control over the 
entity. The listing below shows the subsidiary undertakings as at 31 December 2021:

Subsidiary undertaking

Principal activity

Country of registration

Registered address

GlobalData Australia Pty Limited

Data and analytics

Australia

GlobalData Brasil, serviços e informações 
empresariais Ltda.*

Data and analytics

Brazil

65A Mitcham Road,  
Donvale, Victoria 3111,  
Australia

Rua Tuiuti, 436 Conj 31 - 
Tatuapé, São Paulo - SP, 
03081-003, Brazil

Adfinitum Networks Inc*
GlobalData Canada Inc*

Data and analytics
Data and analytics

Canada
Canada

77 King Street West,  
Suite 400, Toronto  
Ontario M5K 0A1, Canada

GlobalData Trading (Shanghai) Co Limited*

Data and analytics

China

LMC Automotive Consulting (Shanghai) Co. Ltd*

Data and analytics

China

Room 368, Area 302, No.211, 
North Fute Road, Pilot Free 
Trade Zone, Shanghai, China

Suite 1016J, 10th Floor, 
Building 1, No. 1728-1746  
West Nanjing Road, Jing’an 
District, Shanghai, China 

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

125

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

Subsidiary undertaking

Principal activity

Country of registration

Registered address

England & Wales

John Carpenter House,  
John Carpenter Street, 
London, EC4Y 0AN,  
United Kingdom

AROQ Limited*
Attentio Research Limited*
Canadean Limited
CHM Research Limited*
Current Intelligence and Analysis Limited*
Financial News Publishing Limited*
GlobalData Holding Limited
GlobalData Investments Limited*
GlobalData UK Limited*
GlobalData EBT Trustees Limited
Internet Business Group Limited
JBAD Limited*
Kable Business Intelligence Limited 
LMC Automotive Forecasting Limited*
LMC Automotive Limited*
LMC International Limited*
LMC Oxford Holdings Limited*
LMC Tyre & Rubber Limited*
LMCA Holdings Limited*
LMCI Holdings Limited*
Progressive Content Limited*
Progressive Digital Media (Holdings) Limited 
Progressive Digital Media Limited
Progressive Media Group Limited*
Progressive Media UK Limited*
Progressive Media Ventures Limited*
Progressive Ventures Limited*
Research Views Limited*
Sociable Data Limited*
Sportcal Global Communications Limited*
Verdict Media Limited*
World Market Intelligence Limited*

Non-trading
Data and analytics
Data and analytics
Non-trading
Non-trading
Non-trading
Holding company
Non-trading
Data and analytics
Non-trading
Performance advertising
Non-trading
Non-trading
Data and analytics
Data and analytics
Data and analytics
Holding company
Data and analytics
Holding company
Data and analytics
Data and analytics
Holding company
Data and analytics
Non-trading
Non-trading
Holding company
Holding company
Holding company
Non-trading
Non-trading
Non-trading
Data and analytics

GlobalData France SAS*

Data and analytics

France

Attentio Research Centre Private Limited*
Digital Insights and Research Private Limited*
GD Research Centre Private Limited*
Progressive Digital Media Pvt Ltd

Data and analytics
Data and analytics
Data and analytics
Data and analytics

India
India
India 
India 

GlobalData Japan KK*

Data and analytics

Japan

LMC Automotive Japan KK*

Data and analytics

Japan

Canadean Mexico Y Centro America, F. De R.L. De 
C.V*

Data and analytics

Mexico

133 bis Rue de l’Universite, 
75007, Paris, France

3rd - 6th Floors,  
Jyothi Pinnacle Building,  
SY No.11, Kondapur Village,
Serilingampally Mandal, 
 Ranga Reddy Dist,  
Hyderabad,  
Telangana- 500081, India

Tokyo Club Building 11F, 
 3-2-6 Kasumigaseki, 
 Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo, Japan

8F Shinkawa Ohara Building, 
1-27-8 Shinkawa, 
 Chou-ku, Tokyo, Japan

Avenida Ejército Nacional 
769 Piso 2. Colonia Granada. 
Alcaldía Miguel Hidalgo. CP 
11520. Ciudad de México

126

 ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

Subsidiary undertaking

Principal activity

Country of registration

Registered address

GlobalData Poland sp. z o.o*

Data and analytics

Poland

GlobalData Pte Limited*
GlobalData Singapore Pte Limited*

Data and analytics

Singapore 

Progressive Media Korea Limited*

Data and analytics

South Korea

LMC Automotive (Thailand) Company Limited*

Data and analytics

Thailand

MEED Media FZ LLC*

Data and analytics

United Arab Emirates

Global Data Publications, Inc

Data and analytics United States of America

LMC Automotive US Inc*

Data and analytics United States of America

* indirectly held

  ul. Grzybowska 2/29, 
 00-131, Warsaw, Poland

50, Raffles Place  
Unit 38-04A,  
Singapore Land Tower, 
Singapore 048623

37th Floor, ASEM Tower, 
 517 Yeongdong-daero, 
Gangnam Gu, Seoul,  
Republic of Korea  
 06164

66 Q. House Asoke Building, 
Room no.1106, 11th floor, 
Sukhumvit 21 Road, 
Klongtoeynua, Watthana, 
Bankok 10110, Thailand

GBS Building, 6th Floor, 
 Dubai Media City, Dubai, 
United Arab Emirates

441 Lexington Avenue,  
2nd Floor, New York,  
NY, 10017, 
 United States of America

2285 South Michigan Road, 
Eaton Rapids, 
 Michigan 48827, 
United States of America

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

127

“Our One Platform approach 
to our product offering places 
us in a relatively unique 
position for potential M&A. Our 
proprietary platform allows us 
to review M&A opportunities 
with the confidence that we 
can ‘plug in’ and integrate 
new data sets effectively 
and execute at speed.”

Mike Danson, Chief Executive Officer

Company Statement of Financial Position

31 December

31 December

Notes

5

4

7

8

9

10

9

6

12

13

11

6

12

Non-current assets

Property, plant and equipment

Intangible assets

Investments

Current assets

Trade and other receivables

Corporation tax receivable

Short-term derivative assets

Cash and cash equivalents

Total assets

Current liabilities

Trade and other payables

Short-term derivative liabilities

Short-term lease liabilities

Short-term borrowings

Non-current liabilities

Deferred tax liability

Long-term provisions

Long-term lease liabilities

Long-term borrowings

Total liabilities

Net assets

Equity

Share capital

Share premium account

Treasury reserve

Other reserve

Merger reserve

Retained earnings

Equity attributable to equity holders

2021

£m

26.4

0.9

201.6

228.9

196.6

5.6

-

-

202.2

431.1

(30.7)

-

(1.6)

(5.0)

(37.3)

-

(0.2)

(23.8)

(195.2)

(219.2)

(256.5)

174.6

0.2

-

(66.6)

-

-

241.0

174.6

2020

£m

33.5

1.3

191.1

225.9

208.7

7.2

0.7

4.2

220.8

446.7

(133.9)

(0.1)

(2.1)

(5.0)

(141.1)

(0.2)

(0.2)

(29.6)

(70.8)

(100.8)

(241.9)

204.8

0.2

0.7

(21.4)

7.2

163.8

54.3

204.8

These financial statements were approved by the Board of Directors on 28 February 2022 and signed on its behalf by:

Murray Legg
Chairman

Mike Danson 
Chief Executive

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these financial statements. 

Company profit for the year: £27.5m (2020: £31.3m). 

Company number: 03925319

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

129

 
 
 
 
Company Statement of Changes in Equity

l

a
t
i
p
a
c
e
r
a
h
S

i

m
u
m
e
r
p
e
r
a
h
S

t
n
u
o
c
c
a

e
v
r
e
s
e
r
y
r
u
s
a
e
r
T

e
v
r
e
s
e
r
r
e
h
t
O

e
v
r
e
s
e
r
r
e
g
r
e
M

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

0.2

0.7

(11.0)

7.2

163.8

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

(23.7)

13.3

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

0.2

0.7

(21.4)

7.2

163.8

-

-

-

-

171.0

(171.0)

-

0.2

-

-

-

-

-

(0.7)

-

-

-

-

(46.5)

1.3

-

-

-

(66.6)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

(7.2)

(163.8)

-

-

-

-

-

-

i

d
e
n
a
t
e
R

i

s
g
n
n
r
a
e

£m

50.1

31.3

(18.0)

-

(13.3)

4.2

54.3

27.5

(20.4)

-

(1.3)

-

171.7

9.2

241.0

y
t
i
u
q
e

l

a
t
o
T

£m

211.0

31.3

(18.0)

(23.7)

-

4.2

204.8

27.5

(20.4)

(46.5)

-

-

-

9.2

174.6

Balance at 1 January 2020

Total comprehensive income

Transactions with owners:

Dividends

Share buy-back

Vesting of share options

Share-based payments charge

Balance at 31 December 2020

Total comprehensive income

Transactions with owners:

Dividends

Share buy-back

Vesting of share options

Bonus issue of shares

Capital reduction

Share-based payments charge

Balance at 31 December 2021

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these financial statements. 

The Company distributable retained earnings as at 31 December 2021 was £117.8m (2020: distributable retained deficit £13.9m), 
comprising of £241.0m retained earnings and £66.6m treasury reserves which net to £174.4m, of which non-distributable elements are 
£47.7m share-based payment reserve and £8.9m of non-distributable profits. 

Note 23 within the Group Accounts provides an explanation of the movements in equity and reserves above for both the Group and the 
Company.

130

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Company Financial Statements

1. GENERAL INFORMATION

Nature of operations
The principal activity of GlobalData Plc is as a holding company of subsidiary entities which are engaged in providing business information 
in the form of high-quality proprietary data, analytics, and insights to clients in multiple sectors.

GlobalData Plc (‘the Company’) is a company incorporated in the United Kingdom (England & Wales) and listed on the Alternative Investment 
Market, and is therefore publicly owned and limited by shares. The registered office of the Company is John Carpenter House, John Carpenter 
Street, London, EC4Y 0AN. The registered number of the Company is 03925319.

Going concern
The Company meets its day-to-day working capital requirements through free cash flow. Based on cash-flow projections, the Company 
considers the existing financing facilities to be adequate to meet short-term commitments. 

The  existing  finance  facilities  were  issued  with  debt  covenants,  which  are  measured  on  a  quarterly  basis.  Management  has  reviewed 
forecast cash flows and there is no indication that there will be any breach in the next 12 months.

The  Directors  have  a  reasonable  expectation  that  there  are  no  material  uncertainties  that  cast  significant  doubt  about  the  Company’s 
ability to continue in operation and meet its liabilities as they fall due for the foreseeable future, being a period of at least 12 months from 
the date of approval of the financial statements. Accordingly, the Company has prepared the annual report and financial statements on a 
going concern basis.

Critical accounting estimates and judgements
The  Company  makes  estimates  and  assumptions  regarding  the  future.  Estimates  and  judgements  are  continually  evaluated  based  on 
historical experience and other factors, including expectations of future events that are believed to be reasonable under the circumstances. 
In the future, actual experience may deviate from these estimates and assumptions. Management has assessed that there are no critical 
judgements or key estimates in relation to this Company. 

2.  ACCOUNTING POLICIES

a) Basis of preparation
The parent Company meets the definition of a qualifying entity under FRS 100 ‘Application of Financial Reporting Requirements’ issued by 
the Financial Reporting Council. Accordingly, in the year ended 31 December 2021 the Company has undergone transition from reporting 
under IFRS Standards adopted by the IASB to FRS 101 ‘Reduced Disclosure Framework’. This transition is not considered to have had a 
material effect on the financial statements.

As  permitted  by  FRS  101,  the  Company  has  taken  advantage  of  the  disclosure  exemptions  available  under  that  standard  in  relation  to 
share-based payment, financial instruments, capital management, presentation of comparative information in respect of certain assets, 
presentation of a cash-flow statement, standards not yet effective, impairment of assets, certain related party transactions, and certain 
disclosure requirements in respect of leases.

As permitted by s408 of the Companies Act 2006, no separate statement of comprehensive income is presented in respect of the parent 
Company. The profit attributable to the Company is disclosed in the footnote to the Company’s balance sheet.

b) Basis of accounting policies
This report has been prepared based on the accounting policies detailed in the Group’s financial statements for the year ended 31 December 
2021 and the additional policies described below. 

c) Property, plant and equipment
Property,  plant  and  equipment  is  stated  at  historic  cost,  including  expenditure  that  is  directly  attributable  to  the  acquired  item,  less 
accumulated depreciation and impairment losses.

Depreciation is calculated on a straight-line basis over the deemed useful life of an asset and is applied to the cost, less any residual value. 
The asset classes are depreciated over the following periods:

•  Computer and equipment – over 3 to 5 years; and
•  Leasehold improvements – over 3 to 10 years.

The useful life, the residual value and the depreciation method is assessed annually. 

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

131

Notes to the Company Financial Statements

Where there is an indication of impairment, the carrying value of the property, plant and equipment is compared to the higher of value in use 
and the fair value less costs to sell. If the carrying value exceeds the higher of the value in use and fair value less the costs to sell, then the 
asset is impaired and an impairment loss recognised in profit or loss.

d) Intangible assets
Computer software 
Non-integral computer software purchases are capitalised at cost as intangible assets. The Company also capitalises development costs 
associated with new products in accordance with the development criteria prescribed within IAS38 “Intangible Assets”. These costs are 
amortised on a straight-line basis over their estimated useful lives of 3 years. Costs associated with implementing or maintaining computer 
software programmes are recognised as an expense.

e) Investments
Investments in subsidiaries are stated at cost less any provision for impairment.

f) Taxation
Income tax on the profit or loss for the year comprises current and deferred tax.  

Current tax is the expected tax payable on the taxable income for the year, using rates substantively enacted at the reporting date, and any 
adjustments to the tax payable in respect of previous years.

Deferred taxation  is  provided  in full  on temporary  differences  between the  carrying  amount  of the  assets  and  liabilities  in the financial 
statements and the tax base. Deferred tax assets are recognised only to the extent that it is probable that future taxable profits will be 
available against which the temporary difference can be utilised. Deferred tax is determined using the tax rates that have been enacted or 
substantially enacted by the reporting date, and are expected to apply when the deferred tax liability is settled or the deferred tax asset is 
realised.

Deferred tax is provided on temporary differences arising on investments in subsidiaries except where the timing of the reversal of the 
temporary  difference  is  controlled  by  the  Company  and  it  is  probable  that  the  temporary  difference  will  not  reverse  in  the  foreseeable 
future.

Tax is recognised in the income statement, except where it relates to items recognised as other comprehensive income, in which case it is 
recognised in the statement of other comprehensive income.

Tax relating to items recognised in equity is recognised directly in equity.

g) Foreign currencies
The results are presented in Pounds Sterling (£), which is the functional currency of the Company.

Foreign  currency  transactions  are  translated  into  Sterling  at  the  rates  of  exchange  ruling  at  the  date  of  the  transaction,  and  if  still  in 
existence at the year end the balance is retranslated at the rates of exchange ruling at the reporting date. Differences arising from changes 
in exchange rates during the year are taken to the income statement.

h) Provisions
A provision is recognised in the statement of financial position when the Company has a legal obligation or constructive obligation as a 
result of a past event, it is more likely than not that an outflow of resources will be required to settle that obligation, and a reliable estimate 
of the amount can be made. Provisions are discounted if the time value of money is material. 

i) Cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents include cash in hand and deposits held on call, together with other short-term highly liquid investments that are 
readily convertible to known amounts of cash, which are subject to an insignificant risk of changes in value.

j) Dividends
Dividends on the Company’s ordinary shares are recognised as a liability in the Company’s financial statements, and as a deduction from 
equity, in the period in which the dividends are declared. Where such dividends are proposed subject to the approval of the Company’s 
shareholders, the dividends are only declared once shareholder approval has been obtained.

k) Financial instruments 
The Company has derivative and non-derivative financial instruments which comprise foreign currency contracts, receivables, cash, loans 
and borrowings, and trade payables.

Financial  instruments  are  recognised  initially  at  fair  value  plus,  for  instruments  not  at  fair  value  through  profit  and  loss,  any  directly 
attributable transaction costs. 

132

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Notes to the Company Financial Statements

A financial instrument is recognised if the Company becomes a party to the contractual provisions of the instrument. Financial assets are 
de-recognised if the contractual rights to the cash flows from the financial assets expire or if the Company transfers the financial asset 
to another party without retaining control of substantially all risks and rewards of the asset. Financial liabilities are de-recognised if the 
Company’s obligations specified in the contract expire or are discharged or cancelled. 

Cash comprises cash balances and highly liquid call deposits. Bank overdrafts that form an integral part of the Company’s cash management 
are included as a component of cash for the purpose of the statement of cash flows.

Derivative financial instruments
The Company uses derivative financial instruments to reduce its exposure to fluctuations in foreign currency exchange rates. Derivatives 
are measured at fair values and any movement in fair value is recognised in the income statement.

Receivables
Financial assets are assessed for indicators of impairment at each reporting date. Financial assets are impaired where there is objective 
evidence that, as a result of one or more events that occurred after the initial recognition of the financial asset, the estimated future cash 
flows of the investment have been negatively impacted.

A specific provision will be raised for trade receivables when there is objective evidence that the Company will not be able to collect all 
amounts due according to the original terms of the receivables. Significant financial difficulties of the debtor, probability that the debtor will 
enter bankruptcy or financial reorganisation, and default (confirmation from the debtor of failure to repay) or delinquency in payments are 
considered indicators that the trade receivable is impaired.

In determining the provision, the Company also applies the IFRS9 simplified approach to measuring expected credit losses (ECL), which 
uses a lifetime expected loss allowance for all trade receivables. The ECL on these financial assets are estimated based on the Company’s 
historical  credit  loss  experience,  adjusted  for  factors  that  are  specific  to  the  trade  receivables,  general  economic  conditions  and  an 
assessment of both the current as well as the forecast direction of conditions at the reporting date.

For financial assets carried at amortised cost, the amount of the impairment is the difference between the asset’s carrying amount and the 
present value of estimated future cash flows, discounted at an effective interest rate.

When  a  trade  receivable  is  considered  uncollectible,  it  is  written  off  against  the  provision  account.  Subsequent  recoveries  of  amounts 
previously written off are credited against the provision account. Changes in the carrying amount of the provision are recognised in the 
income statement.

Trade and other payables
Trade and other payables are initially measured at fair value, and are subsequently measured at amortised cost, using the effective interest 
method.

l) Borrowings and borrowing costs 
Borrowings  are  recognised  initially  at  fair value,  net  of  transaction  costs  incurred,  and  subsequently  at  amortised  cost. Any  difference 
between the proceeds (net of transaction costs) and the redemption value is recognised in the income statement over the period of the 
borrowings using the effective interest method. 

Borrowings are classified as current liabilities unless the Company has an unconditional right to defer settlement of the liability for at least 
12 months from the reporting date. 

Borrowing costs, being interest and other costs incurred in connection with the servicing of borrowings, are recognised as an expense 
when incurred.

m) Share-based payments
The Group operates two share-based compensation plans under which the entity receives services from employees as consideration for 
equity instruments (options) of the Company. The fair value of the employee services received in exchange for the grant of the options 
and awards is recognised as an expense in the Group income statement. The total amount to be expensed is determined by reference to 
the fair value of the options granted, excluding the impact of any non-market service and performance vesting conditions (for example, 
profitability, sales growth targets and remaining an employee of the entity over a specified time period). Non-market vesting conditions 
are included in assumptions about the number of options and awards that are expected to vest. The total amount expensed is recognised 
over the vesting period, which is the period over which all of the specified existing conditions are to be satisfied. At each reporting date, the 
entity revises its estimates of the number of options and awards that are expected to vest based on the non-market vesting conditions. 
It recognises the impact of the revision to original estimates, if any, in the Group income statement, with a corresponding adjustment to 
equity. 

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

133

 
 
 
 
Notes to the Company Financial Statements

The Company does not directly employ those participating in the share-based payments scheme as they are employed by other Group 
companies. The issue of share incentives by the Company to employees of its subsidiaries represents additional capital contributions. An 
addition to the Company’s investment in Group undertakings is reported with a corresponding increase in shareholders’ funds.

n) Leases
The Company leases a number of offices in the United Kingdom, plus a small number of motor vehicles. Rental contracts are typically made 
for fixed periods but may have extension options. Lease terms are negotiated on an individual basis and contain a wide range of different 
terms and conditions. The lease arrangements do not impose any covenants, but leased assets may not be used as security for borrowing 
purposes. 

For any new contracts entered into, the Company considers whether a contract is, or contains a lease. A lease is defined as ‘a contract, or 
part of a contract, that conveys the right to use an asset (the underlying asset) for a period of time in exchange for consideration’. To apply 
this definition, the Company assesses whether the contract meets the following criteria:
• 

 the contract contains an identified asset, which is either explicitly identified in the contract or implicitly specified by being identified at 
the time the asset is made available to the Company;
 the Company has the right to obtain substantially all of the economic benefits from use of the identified asset throughout the period of 
use, considering its rights within the defined scope of the contract; and
the Company has the right to direct the use of the identified asset throughout the period of use. 

• 

• 

At the lease commencement date, the Company recognises the lease as a right-of-use asset and a corresponding liability on the statement 
of financial position. The right-of-use assets have been included in property, plant and equipment. 

The right-of-use asset is measured at cost, which is made up of the initial measurement of the lease liability, any initial direct costs incurred 
by the Company, an estimate of any costs to dismantle and remove the asset at the end of the lease and any lease payments made in 
advance of the lease commencement date (net of any incentives received).  

The Company depreciates the right-of-use assets on a straight-line basis from the lease commencement date to the earlier of the end of 
the useful life of the right-of-use asset or the end of the lease term. The Company also assesses the right-of-use asset for impairment 
when such indicators exist. 

At the  commencement  date, the  Company  measures the  lease  liability  at the  present value  of the  lease  payments  unpaid  at that  date, 
discounted  using the  interest  rate  implicit  in the  lease  if that  rate  is  readily  available,  or the  lease-specific  incremental  borrowing  rate. 
Subsequent  to  initial  measurement,  the  liability  will  be  reduced  for  payments  made  and  increased  for  interest.  Each  lease  payment  is 
allocated between the liability and finance cost. The finance cost is charged to the income statement over the lease period so as to produce 
a  constant  periodic  rate  of  interest  on  the  remaining  balance  of  the  liability  for  each  period.  The  liability  is  remeasured  to  reflect  any 
reassessment or modification, or if there are changes in in-substance fixed payments. When the liability is remeasured, the corresponding 
adjustment is reflected in the right-of-use asset, or the income statement if the right-of-use asset is already reduced to zero. 

Termination  options  are  included  in  a  number  of  property  leases  across the  Company. These  options  are  used to  maximise  operational 
flexibility in terms of managing contracts. In determining the lease term, management considers all facts and circumstances that create an 
economic incentive to exercise a termination option. Periods after termination options are only included in the lease term if the termination 
option is reasonably certain not to be exercised.    

The  Company  has  elected  to  account  for  short-term  leases  and  leases  of  low-value  assets  using  the  practical  expedients.  Payments 
associated with  short-term  leases  and  leases  of  low-value  assets  are  recognised  on  a  straight-line  basis  as  an  expense  in the  income 
statement. Short-term leases are leases with a term of 12 months or less. Low-value assets comprise IT and copying equipment with a 
value of less than £5,000. 

The Company sub-leases a number of properties in the UK; however, all of the risks and rewards of ownership have not been transferred 
to the lessee and therefore the Company recognises the head lease asset as a right-of-use asset and recognises the rental income on the 
sub-lease operating lease contracts as other income. 

134

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Notes to the Company Financial Statements

3. DIVIDENDS

The final dividend for 2020 was 11.6 pence per share and was paid in April 2021. The total dividend for the current year is 19.3 pence per 
share, with an interim dividend of 6.1 pence per share paid on 1 October 2021 to shareholders on the register at the close of business on 3 
September 2021, and a final dividend of 13.2 pence per share will be paid on 29 April 2022 to shareholders on the register at the close of 
business on 1 April 2022. The ex-dividend date will be on 31 March 2022.

Following the 2020 year end, the Directors became aware that the Company had made unlawful distributions in 2018, 2019 and 2020 on 
account  of the fact that  it  had  incorrectly  included  reserves  arising from  share-based  payments,  relating to  employees  of  subsidiaries, 
as distributable and had not filed interim accounts in accordance with section 838 of the Companies Act 2006 to demonstrate sufficient 
reserves were available for distribution. Therefore, during the period from May 2018 through to January 2021, contributions made to the 
Employee Benefit Trust, in order to buy-back shares to satisfy the employee share options plan, and distributions by way of dividends were 
unlawful distributions in accordance with section 838 of the Companies Act 2006.  

In order to correct the position, the Company filed interim (unaudited) accounts with Companies House on 23 March 2021 (in advance of 
the Annual General Meeting) to demonstrate it had sufficient reserves. At the Company’s Annual General Meeting, the Company proposed a 
resolution to remove any right the Company may have had to claim from Directors and Shareholders in respect of the relevant contributions 
and distributions. The payments deemed to be unlawful during this period were £7.1m in 2018, £18.3m in 2019, £34.8m in 2020 and £0.3m in 
January 2021. Upstream dividends were paid in advance of the interim accounts to create additional distributable reserves in the Company 
and the resolutions regularised the matter. In addition, as disclosed above, the Company undertook a Capital Reduction and cancelled the 
Share Premium account which created additional distributable reserves of £171.7m. Interim (unaudited) accounts were filed on 31 May 2021 
to demonstrate sufficient distributable reserves in advance of the interim dividend being paid. 

4. INTANGIBLE ASSETS 

Cost

As at 1 January 2020

Additions

As at 31 December 2020

Additions

Reclassification to PPE

As at 31 December 2021

Amortisation

As at 1 January 2020

Charge for the year

As at 31 December 2020

Charge for the year

Reclassification to PPE

As at 31 December 2021

Net book value

As at 31 December 2021

As at 31 December 2020

Computer software

£m

5.5

0.8

6.3

0.3

(0.5)

6.1

(4.3)

(0.7)

(5.0)

(0.5)

0.3

(5.2)

0.9

1.3

Brand

£m

0.1

-

0.1

-

-

0.1

(0.1)

-

(0.1)

-

-

(0.1)

-

-

Total

£m

5.6

0.8

6.4

0.3

(0.5)

6.2

(4.4)

(0.7)

(5.1)

(0.5)

0.3

(5.3)

0.9

1.3

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

135

 
 
 
Notes to the Company Financial Statements

5. PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT

Cost

As at 1 January 2020

Additions

As at 31 December 2020

Additions

Reclassification from intangibles

Disposals

As at 31 December 2021

Depreciation

As at 1 January 2020

Charge for the year

As at 31 December 2020

Charge for the year

Reclassification from intangibles

Disposals

As at 31 December 2021

Net book value

As at 31 December 2021

As at 31 December 2020

The buildings category all relates to right-of-use assets. 

Buildings

Leasehold 
improvements

 Computer  
equipment

£m

36.5

-

36.5

0.2

-

(5.7)

31.0

(2.8)

(2.7)

(5.5)

(2.5)

-

1.5

(6.5)

24.5

31.0

£m

0.7

0.6

1.3

-

-

-

1.3

(0.1)

(0.1)

(0.2)

(0.2)

-

-

(0.4)

0.9

1.1

£m

4.2

1.2

5.4

-

0.5

(2.7)

3.2

(3.4)

(0.6)

(4.0)

(0.6)

(0.3)

2.7

(2.2)

1.0

1.4

Total

£m

41.4

1.8

43.2

0.2

0.5

(8.4)

35.5

(6.3)

(3.4)

(9.7)

(3.3)

(0.3)

4.2

(9.1)

26.4

33.5

136

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Notes to the Company Financial Statements

6. LEASES

The Company has leases for office buildings and motor vehicles. With the exception of short-term leases and leases of low-value underlying 
assets, each lease is reflected on the statement of financial position as a right-of-use asset and a lease liability. The Company classifies its 
right-of-use assets in a consistent manner to its property, plant and equipment (see note 5). 

Lease liabilities are presented in the statement of financial position as follows:

Current lease liabilities

Non-current lease liabilities

31 December 2021

31 December 2020

£m

1.6

23.8

25.4

£m

2.1

29.6

31.7

The table below describes the nature of the Company’s leasing activities by type of right-of-use asset recognised on the statement of 
financial position:

No. of right-of-use 
assets leased

Range of remaining 
term

Average remaining 
lease term

No. of leases with 
extension options

No. of leases with 
termination options

Office buildings

Motor vehicles

7

1

3 – 13 years

1 – 2 years

7 years

1 – 2 years

-

-

2

-

The lease liabilities are secured by the related underlying assets. Future minimum lease payments at 31 December 2021 were as follows:

As at 31 December 2021

Lease payments

Finance charges

Net present values

As at 31 December 2020

Lease payments

Finance charges

Net present values

Within one year
£m
2.5

One to five years 
£m
11.2

After five years
£m
17.6

(0.9)

1.6

(2.9)

8.3

(2.1)

15.5

Within one year
£m

 One to five years 
£m

After five years
£m

3.5

(1.1)

2.4

14.2

(3.6)

10.6

21.8

(2.8)

19.0

Total
£m
31.3

(5.9)

25.4

Total
£m

39.5

(7.5)

32.0

At 31 December 2021 the Company had not committed to any leases which had not yet commenced, excluding those recognised as a 
lease liability. 

The Company sublets certain areas of its property portfolio. As at 31 December 2021, the Company had contracts with sub-tenants for the 
following future minimum lease rentals:

Land and buildings

Within one year

Within one to two years

Within two to three years 

Within three to four years

Within four to five years

Over five years

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

31 December 2021

31 December 2020

£m

0.2

0.2

0.2

0.2

0.2

1.1

2.1

£m

1.3

1.3

1.3

1.3

1.3

5.3

11.8

137

 
 
Notes to the Company Financial Statements

7. INVESTMENTS

Cost

As at 1 January 2020

Share-based payments to employees of subsidiaries – scheme 1

Share-based payments to employees of subsidiaries – scheme 2

Acquisition of subsidiary

As at 31 December 2020

Share-based payments to employees of subsidiaries – scheme 1

Share-based payments to employees of subsidiaries – scheme 2

Increase in investment in subsidiary

As at 31 December 2021

Impairment

As at 31 December 2020 and 31 December 2021

Net book value

As at 31 December 2021

As at 31 December 2020

Group undertakings

£m

196.4

2.8

1.4

2.9

203.5

6.3

2.9

1.3

214.0

(12.4)

201.6

191.1

Share-based payments to employees of subsidiaries
The issue of share incentives by the Company to employees of its subsidiaries represents additional capital contributions. An addition to 
the Company’s investment in Group undertakings is reported with a corresponding increase in shareholders’ funds.

Increase in investment in subsidiary
As part of a group restructuring project undertaken during the year, Progressive Digital Media (Holdings) Limited (which is a 100% owned 
subsidiary of the Company) issued an additional share at a premium of £1.27m. 

Impairment review
Management  has  performed  an  impairment  review  which  entails  making  judgements  including  the  expected  rate  of  growth  of  sales, 
margins expected to be achieved and the appropriate discount rate to apply when valuing future cash flows. The cash flow projections for 
each statutory entity are based on each statutory entity’s 2021 profit before tax, with growth factors applied to cover the period 2022-2026. 
The discount rate is derived by calculating weighted average costs of equity and debt. The rate reflects appropriate adjustments relating 
to market risk and risk factors of each entity. A terminal value calculation has been determined post-2026 using a growth rate of 2% in 
accordance with the OECD long-term forecast. 

Impairment indicators
In  addition  to  the  review  described  above,  management  has  performed  an  assessment  to  identify  whether  there  are  any  indicators  of 
impairment to the investment balances. As the Company’s net assets exceeded the Group net assets there is an indication of possible 
impairment,  however  sufficient  evidence  has  been  obtained  to  support  that  there  is  no  impairment  as  the value  in  use  forecasts  have 
sufficient headroom over the carrying amount of the investments. The assumptions applied within the value in use forecasts (revenue, cost 
and terminal value growth rates and discount rate) are in line with the assumptions disclosed within the intangible asset impairment review 
in note 13 of the Group accounts.

138

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Notes to the Company Financial Statements

8. TRADE AND OTHER RECEIVABLES

Prepayments 

Other receivables

Amounts owed by group undertakings

Other taxation and social security

31 December 2021

31 December 2020

£m

-

0.1

196.0

0.5

196.6

£m

1.4

0.6

206.1

0.6

208.7

The carrying values are considered to be a reasonable approximation of fair value. The effect of discounting other receivables has been 
assessed and is deemed to be immaterial to the results. 

Following an internal group re-organisation exercise, the Company has impaired £0.6m in relation to balances owed by group undertakings 
(2020: £0.4m). 

Amounts owed by group undertakings are repayable upon demand and outstanding balances contain transactions including the following:
•  Loans to group undertakings
• 
•  Recharge of costs
•  Cash pooling

Inter-company interest receivable

None of the transactions with group undertakings incorporate special terms and conditions and no guarantees were given or received. 
Outstanding balances are usually settled in cash. 

9. DERIVATIVE ASSETS AND LIABILITIES

Short-term derivative assets

Short-term derivative liabilities

Net derivative asset

31 December 2021

31 December 2020

£m
-

-

-

£m
0.7

(0.1)

0.6

Classification is based on when the derivatives mature. The fair values of derivatives are expected to impact the income statement over 
the next year, dependent on movements in the fair value of the foreign exchange contracts. The movement in the year was an expense of 
£0.6m (2020: £nil).

The Group uses derivative financial instruments to reduce its exposure to fluctuations in foreign currency exchange rates. Forward 
contracts are now being entered into by GlobalData UK Limited (an indirect subsidiary), therefore as at 31 December 2021, the Company 
has not entered into any forward exchange contracts.

10. TRADE AND OTHER PAYABLES

Trade payables

Accruals 

Amounts owed to group undertakings

31 December 2021

31 December 2020

£m

0.5

3.3

26.9

30.7

£m

0.9

3.4

129.6

133.9

The Directors consider the carrying amount of trade payables approximates to their fair value. The effect of discounting trade and other 
payables has been assessed and is deemed to be immaterial to the Company’s results. Amounts owed to related parties are repayable on 
demand and non-interest bearing.

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

139

 
Notes to the Company Financial Statements

11. PROVISIONS

As at 1 January 2021 and 31 December 2021

Current:

Non-current:

12. BORROWINGS

Short-term lease liabilities

Short-term borrowings

Current liabilities 

Long-term lease liabilities

Long-term borrowings

Non-current liabilities

Dilapidations
Right-of-use assets

Dilapidations
Other

£m

0.1

-

0.1

£m

0.1

-

0.1

Total

£m

0.2

-

0.2

31 December 2021

31 December 2020

£m

1.6

5.0

6.6

23.8

195.2

219.0

The changes in the Company’s borrowings can be classified as follows:

Short-term 
borrowings

Long-term 
borrowings

Short-term  
lease liabilities1

Long-term  
lease liabilities1

As at 1 January 2020

Cash flows:

- Repayment

- Proceeds

- Loan fees paid

Non-cash:

- Loan fee amortisation until modification date

- Fair value adjustments since modification

- Lease liabilities2

- Reclassification

As at 31 December 2020

Cash flows:

- Repayment

- Proceeds

- Loan fees paid

Non-cash:

- Fair value adjustments since modification

- Lease additions

- Lease liabilities2

- Reclassification

As at 31 December 2021

£m

6.0

(5.3)

-

-

-

-

-

4.3

5.0

(5.0)

-

-

-

-

-

5.0

5.0

£m

60.5

-

15.0

(0.7)

0.1

0.2

-

(4.3)

70.8

-

129.0

(0.4)

0.8

-

-

(5.0)

195.2

£m

1.8

(3.5)

-

-

-

-

1.4

2.4

2.1

(3.3)

-

-

-

0.2

0.5

2.1

1.6

1 Amounts are net of rental prepayments and accruals 
2 Represents lease interest, dilapidations and movement on lease liability accruals and prepayments

£m

32.0

-

-

-

-

-

-

(2.4)

29.6

-

-

-

-

-

(3.7)

(2.1)

23.8

£m

2.1

5.0

7.1

29.6

70.8

100.4

Total

£m

100.3

(8.8)

15.0

(0.7)

0.1

0.2

1.4

-

107.5

(8.3)

129.0

(0.4)

0.8

0.2

(3.2)

-

225.6

140

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Notes to the Company Financial Statements

Term loan and RCF
In  May  2020, the  Group  announced that  it  had  agreed to  increase  its  current  banking facilities with  NatWest  Group,  HSBC  and  Bank  of 
Ireland, extending the current maturity to April 2023 (previously April 2022). The arrangements increased the total committed facility to 
£145.5m (previously £100m), plus a further uncommitted accordion facility of £75m. The committed facility comprised a term loan of £50m 
and a revolving credit facility (RCF) of £95.5m.

In  September  2021,  the  Group  amended  and  restated  its  facilities  agreement  in  order  to  convert  its  uncommitted  accordion  facility  of 
£75m into a committed incremental RCF. Silicon Valley Bank became an additional lender as part of the syndicate. No other changes to the 
repayment terms agreed in May 2020 were made.

In  December  2021,  the  Group  made  a  further  amendment  and  restatement  to  its  facilities  agreement,  increasing  the  RCF  to  £115.5m 
(previously £95.5m) to support future M&A activities. No other changes to the repayment terms agreed in May 2020 were made.

The term loan is repayable in quarterly instalments, with total repayments due in the next 12 months of £5.0m. The outstanding term loan 
balance as at 31 December 2021 is £41.3m, with a fair value in accordance with IFRS9 of £40.9m. As at 31 December 2021, the Group had 
drawn down £84.5m of the RCF and £75.0m of the incremental RCF (former accordion facility), with a total fair value in accordance with 
IFRS9 of £159.3m. Interest is currently charged on the term loan, drawn down RCF and incremental RCF (former accordion facility) at a rate 
of 3.25% over the Sterling Overnight Interbank Average Rate (SONIA).

In accordance with IFRS9, Management has performed a comparison of the fair value of the new debt with the old debt to determine whether 
there  has  been  a  substantial  modification  requiring  de-recognition.  The  assessment  concluded  that  there  has  not  been  a  substantial 
modification, the difference between the fair value of the new debt with the old debt was £0.0m.

13. DEFERRED INCOME TAX

31 December 2021

31 December 2020

Balance brought forward

Tax (income)/expense during the period recognised in profit or loss

Balance carried forward

The provision for deferred taxation consists of the tax effect of temporary differences in respect of:

£m

0.2

(0.2)

-

-

-

-

£m

-

0.2

0.2

0.1

0.1

0.2

31 December 2021

31 December 2020

£m

-

-

-

£m

-

(0.2)

(0.2)

Accelerated depreciation for tax purposes

Other temporary differences

Balance carried forward

Deferred tax assets

Deferred tax liability

Net position

Finance Act 2021 increased the UK corporation tax rate from 19% to 25%, effective 1 April 2023, for companies with profits in excess of 
£250,000. The company's deferred tax assets and liabilities have therefore been remeasured at the tax rates that are expected to apply to 
the period when the asset is realised or the liability is settled.

The company has unrecognised tax losses of £0.3m (2020: £nil) that are indefinitely available for offsetting against future taxable profits. 
If the company were able to recognise all unrecognised deferred tax assets at the UK's current statutory income tax rate of 19%, the profit 
would increase by £0.1m (2020: £nil).

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

141

Notes to the Company Financial Statements

14. RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS

Directors
The remuneration of the Directors of the Group and Company is set out on page 61 in the consolidated accounts of the Group within the 
Directors' Remuneration Report.

Accommodation
As at 31 December 2021 the Company has no related party landlords, following the sale of the John Carpenter and Essex Street properties 
by the Estel Properties Group to third party landlords and, secondly, the surrender of the Hatton Garden lease by GlobalData. The surrender 
of the lease is beneficial to the Company and removes the liability, which was due to run to 2028, a non-cash gain of £129,000 has been 
recognised on disposal of the lease. This represents the difference between the value of the lease asset and lease liability under IFRS16 at 
the date of surrender. 

Prior to the removal of the related party relationship with the landlord, the Company incurred accommodation charges of £0.8m (2020: 
£2.9m).

In addition, the Company sub-leases office space to other companies owned by Mike Danson. The total sub-lease income for the year ended 
31 December 2021 was £0.4m (2020: £1.3m).

Corporate support services
Corporate support charges of £0.2m (2020: £0.4m) were recharged during the year, which principally consisted of shared IT as well as 
payroll, facilities and HR support which has now ceased. These have been recharged on a consistent basis to the previous year and are 
determined by specific drivers of cost such as proportional occupancy of building for facilities and headcount for IT, HR and payroll services. 

142

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Advisers

Company Secretary 
Graham Lilley

Head Office and Registered Office
John Carpenter House
John Carpenter Street
London
EC4Y 0AN
Tel: + 44 (0) 20 7936 6400

Corporate Broker 
Panmure Gordon
One New Change
London
EC4M 9AF

Corporate Broker 
HSBC
8 Canada Square
London
E14 5HQ

Nominated Adviser and Corporate Broker
J.P. Morgan Cazenove
25 Bank Street
Canary Wharf
London
E14 5JP

Solicitors 
ReedSmith
20 Primrose Street 
London
EC2A 2RS

Auditor 
Deloitte LLP
Hill House
1 Little New Street
London
EC4A 3HQ

Registrars
Link Group
10th Floor, Central Square
29 Wellington Street
Leeds
LS1 4DL

Bankers
NatWest Group
280 Bishopsgate 
London
EC2M 4RB

Registered number
Company No. 03925319

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

143

Notes to the Company Financial Statements

“Our business model and the 
sector we are in give us a 
great platform for growth and 
significant resilience against 
wider macro-economic factors. 
As a trusted intelligence 
provider, our products and 
services historically benefit 
from increased usage and 
demand, as our customers  
look to successfully navigate  
periods of uncertainty.”

Mike Danson, Chief Executive Officer

144

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

Strategic Report

Chairman’s Statement

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

145

Strategic Report

Chairman’s Statement

146

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2021

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020

147

Head Office and Registered Office
John Carpenter House
John Carpenter Street
London
EC4Y 0AN
Tel: + 44 (0) 20 7936 6400